Yamaha HTR-5450 Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: HTR-5450

Categoría: Receptor

Tipo: Manual de usuario

Este manual también es adecuado para

HTR-5440

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia ID V723100-1

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

HTR-5450

HTR-5440

Natural Sound AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

U C A

00HTR5450/5440-cv 3/29/1, 11:27 AM1

CAUTION

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within

an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the unit is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the operating

instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions

should be followed.

5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near water

– for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry

tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, etc.

6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a cart or

stand that is recommended by the manufacturer.

6A A unit and cart combination should be moved

with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and

uneven surfaces may cause the unit and cart

combination to overturn.

7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should

be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its location or

position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For

example, the unit should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or

similar surface, that may block the ventilation openings; or

placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase or cabinet

that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation

openings.

9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources

such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce heat.

10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power supply

only of the type described in the operating instructions or as

marked on the unit.

11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed

so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items

placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to

cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where

they exit from the unit.

12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as recommended

by the manufacturer.

13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be

unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period

of time.

14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that objects

do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the inside of the

unit.

15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced by

qualified service personnel when:

A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or

B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the

unit; or

C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or

D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits

a marked change in performance; or

E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged.

16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit

beyond those means described in the operating instructions.

All other servicing should be referred to qualified service

personnel.

17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away

from power lines.

18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken so

that the grounding or polarization is not defeated.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION

I CAUTION

0101HTR5450/5440_caution_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM2

CAUTION

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions.

Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to

comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,

Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with

these requirements provides a reasonable level of

assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found

in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to

the operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which can

be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please

try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following

measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute

this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate

retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A.

6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by

playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud

and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most

importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.

19 For US customers only:

Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is

connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is grounded

so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and

built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical

Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to

proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure,

grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit,

size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge

unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for

the grounding electrode.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC

– NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only)

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged

exposure from excessive volume levels.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s

attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines

for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable

ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the

building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION II

0101HTR5450/5440_caution_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM3

CAUTION

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this

manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future

reference.

2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the

right and left, and 10 cm at the back of this unit for

ventilation space — away from direct sunlight, heat

sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical

appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid

humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock,

do not place this unit where it may get exposed to

rain, water, and/or any type of liquid.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature

changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit

in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with

a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit,

which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to

this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage

and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause

electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this

unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,

curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If

the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may

overheat, possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall

outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this

might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.

Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is

dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held

responsible for any damage resulting from use of this

unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the

power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical

storm.

14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/

or liquid drops inside this unit.

15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact

qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any

service is needed. The cabinet should never be

opened for any reasons.

16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of

time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug

from the wall outlet.

17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

on common operating errors before concluding that

this unit is faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set

this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC

power plug from the wall outlet.

19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models

only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this

unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE

plugging into the AC main supply.

Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source

as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this

unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby

mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a

very small quantity of power.

FREQUENCY STEP switch

(China and General models only)

Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in

different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch

(locating at the rear) according to the frequency spacing

in your area.

North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz

Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz

Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug

of this unit from the AC outlet.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

III CAUTION

0101HTR5450/5440_caution_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM4

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

FEATURES .......................................................... 2

GETTING STARTED ......................................... 3

Checking the Package Contents ............................. 3

Battery Installation in the Remote Control ............ 3

Battery Replacement .............................................. 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ....................... 4

Front Panel ............................................................. 4

Remote Control ...................................................... 6

Using the Remote Control ...................................... 7

Display ................................................................... 8

Rear Panel .............................................................. 9

PREPARATION

SPEAKER SETUP ............................................ 10

Speakers to Be Used ............................................ 10

Speaker Placement ............................................... 10

CONNECTIONS ............................................... 11

Before Connecting Components ........................... 11

Connecting Audio Components ........................... 12

Connecting an External Decoder ......................... 12

Connecting Video Components ............................ 14

Connecting Speakers ............................................ 16

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch ..................... 18

Connecting the Power Supply Cords ................... 18

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE .... 19

Before You Start Adjusting .................................. 19

Using the Test Tone .............................................. 19

BASIC OPERATION

PLAYING A SOURCE ...................................... 21

Input Modes and Indications ................................ 23

Selecting a DSP Program ..................................... 24

Canceling the Sound Effect

(turning off the effect speakers) ....................... 25

TUNING ............................................................. 26

Connecting the Antennas ..................................... 26

Automatic Tuning ................................................ 27

Manual Tuning ..................................................... 27

Automatic Preset Tuning

(for FM stations only) ...................................... 28

Manual Preset Tuning .......................................... 29

To Recall a Preset Station .................................... 29

Exchanging Preset Stations .................................. 30

RECORDING A SOURCE ............................... 31

ADVANCED OPERATION

SET MENU ......................................................... 32

Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU .............. 32

1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) .......... 33

2 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ...... 34

3 I/O ASSIGN ...................................................... 34

4 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................. 35

5 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) ................. 35

6 DTS SET (DTS LFE level) ............................... 36

7 SP DLY TIME (center delay) ............................ 36

8 DISPLAY SET .................................................. 36

9 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ...................... 36

DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT

LEVELS .......................................................... 37

Delay Time ........................................................... 37

Sound Output Level of the Center, Right Rear

and Left Rear Speakers, and Subwoofer .......... 37

Adjusting Method ................................................ 38

SLEEP TIMER .................................................. 39

Setting the SLEEP Timer ..................................... 39

Canceling the SLEEP Timer ................................ 39

PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ...................... 40

Component Selector Buttons ............................... 40

Controlling the Components Connected to

This Unit .......................................................... 40

Description of Each Mode ................................... 41

Setting the Manufacturer Code ............................ 45

Returning to the Factory Setting .......................... 46

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............................ 47

Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................ 47

CINEMA DSP Programs ...................................... 47

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING .................................... 50

SPECIFICATIONS (HTR-5450) ...................... 54

SPECIFICATIONS (HTR-5440) ...................... 55

GLOSSARY ....................................................... 56

INDEX ................................................................ 58

0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM1

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US

Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and

pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of

• This document is the Owner’s Manual for both the HTR-5450 and HTR-5440. For details on various functions unique

to each model, see the descriptions given for each model name. Illustrations for the HTR-5450 are used for common

functions.

•

y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when

the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in

parentheses in this manual.

FEATURES

5-Channel Power Amplification

◆ Minimum RMS Output

(0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz)

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

Main: 80 W + 80 W (8 Ω)

Center: 80 W (8 Ω)

Rear: 80 W + 80 W (8 Ω)

[Australia, Singapore, China and General models]

Main: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω)

Center: 70 W (8 Ω)

Rear: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω)

Main: 65 W + 65 W (8 Ω)

Center: 65 W (8 Ω)

Rear: 65 W + 65 W (8 Ω)

◆ Maximum Power (EIAJ)

(10% THD, 1 kHz)

[China and General models]

Main: 100 W + 100 W (8 Ω)

Center: 100 W (8 Ω)

Rear: 100 W + 100 W (8 Ω)

[China and General models]

Main: 95 W + 95 W (8 Ω)

Center: 95 W (8 Ω)

Rear: 95 W + 95 W (8 Ω)

HTR-5450

HTR-5440

HTR-5450

HTR-5440

Multi-mode Digital Sound Field

Processing

◆ DTS Decoder

◆ Dolby Pro Logic Decoder

◆ Dolby Digital Decoder

◆ Hi-Fi DSP

◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP

Technology and Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or

DTS

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

Sophisticated FM/AM Tuner

◆ 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning

◆ Automatic Preset Tuning

◆ Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing)

Other Features

◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter

◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 9 Items

for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video

System

◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance

Adjustment

◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future

Formats

◆ Video Signal Input and Output Capability

(Including S Video Connections

)

◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Signal Input Jacks

◆ SLEEP Timer

◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes

HTR-5450 only

0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM2

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

GETTING STARTED

Checking the Package Contents

Check that the following items are included in your package.

Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4 type) AM loop antenna

Battery Installation in the Remote

Control

1 Turn the remote control over and slide the

battery compartment cover in the direction of

the arrow.

2 Insert the batteries (AAA, R03 or UM-4 type)

according to the polarity markings on the

inside of the battery compartment.

3 Close the battery compartment cover.

Battery Replacement

If the remote control operates only when it is close to the

unit, the batteries are weak. Replace all the batteries with

new ones.

Be sure to replace the batteries within about two minutes.

If it takes longer than two minutes, the codes preset for

the remote control will return to the factory settings.

Notes

• Use only AAA, R03 or UM-4 batteries for replacement.

• Be sure the battery polarity is correct. (See the illustration inside

the battery compartment.)

• Remove the batteries if the remote control will not be used for an

extended period of time.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

Quick reference card

Connection guide

Indoor FM antenna

(U.S.A., Canada, China and

General models)

(Australia and

Singapore models)

0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM3

SURROUND

DIGITAL

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

–

TREBLE

–

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

7 8

pu a

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front Panel

1 STANDBY/ON

Press this switch to turn on the power of this unit or to set

this unit in the standby mode. Before turning the power on,

set the volume at the minimum level.

Standby mode

In this mode, this unit consumes a very small quantity of

power to receive infrared-signals from the remote

control.

SURROUND

DIGITAL

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES VIDEO L AUDIO R

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

– +

TREBLE

– +

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

7 8

pu a

HTR-5450

HTR-5440

2 Remote control sensor

This receives signals from the remote control.

3 Display

This shows various information.

4 INPUT MODE

Press this button to select the input mode among AUTO,

DTS and ANALOG for the sources that send two or more

types of signals to this unit.

0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM4

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

5 VOLUME

Turn this control to turn up or down the volume.

6 6CH INPUT

Press this button to select the source connected to the 6CH

INPUT jacks. The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT

takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h

(or the input selector buttons on the remote control).

7 BASS

Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise

to decrease the low-frequency response.

8 TREBLE

Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise

to decrease the high-frequency response.

Note

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-

frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the

center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and right

main speakers.

9 BALANCE

This control is only effective for the sound from the main

speakers.

Turn the control to adjust the balance of the output volume

from the right and left main speakers to compensate for

sound imbalance caused by the speaker location or listening

room conditions.

0 SPEAKERS A/B

Set A or B (or both A and B) to the ON position for the main

speaker system (connected to this unit) that you want to use.

Set the button(s) to the OFF position for the main speaker

system that you don’t want to use.

q PROGRAM l / h

Press l or h to select a DSP program when the effect

speakers (center and rear) are turned on. The name of the

selected program appears on the display.

w EFFECT

Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center

and rear). If you turn them off, all Dolby Digital and DTS

audio signals except for the LFE channel are directed to the

right and left main speakers. In that case, the output levels

of the right and left speakers may not match.

e PHONES jack

Connect the headphones to the PHONES jack so that this

unit outputs audio signals for private listening.

When listening with headphones privately, set both

SPEAKERS A/B to the OFF position.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

r VIDEO AUX jacks

Connect an auxiliary audio or video input source such as a

game console or camcorder to these jacks. To reproduce

source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input

source.

t PRESET/TUNING l / h

When “ z ” appears on the display:

This button is used to select a preset station number (1 to 8).

Press l to select a lower and h to select a higher preset

station number.

When “ z ” goes off from the display:

This button is used for tuning. Press l to tune in to lower

frequencies, and h to tune in to higher frequencies.

y A/B/C/D/E

Press this button to select one of 5 preset station groups (A

to E).

u PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)

Press this button to turn on or off “ z ” on the display and

switch the function between for storing a broadcasting

station (preset tuning) and for tuning. This button is also

used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with

each other.

i MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Press this button to store the broadcasting stations. Hold

down this button for more than 3 seconds to begin

automatic preset tuning (for FM stations only).

o TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Press this button to switch the tuning mode between

automatic and manual. To use the automatic tuning method,

press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on

the display. To use the manual tuning method, press this

button so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off.

p FM/AM

Press this button to switch the reception band between FM

and AM.

a INPUT l / h

Press these buttons to select the input source (DVD, AUX,

MD/CD-R, TUNER, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL) that

you want to listen to or watch. The name of the selected

input source appears on the display.

0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM5

Remote Control

1 Indicator

This flashes in red when pressing a button on the remote

control. If it flashes rapidly several times, press the selected

button again.

2 Component selector buttons

Press one of these buttons which corresponds to the

component you want to control with the remote control.

(The proper code must be set for your component. Refer to

“Setting the Manufacturer Code”.) When the component

selector button has been pressed, the remote control is set to

that component operation mode.

3 POWER

Each time you press this button, the unit switches between

the power on and standby mode.

4 TEST

Press this button to output the test tone for each speaker.

5 A/B/C/D/E, PRESET –/+

These buttons are used to select a preset station.

A/B/C/D/E: To select one of a group (A to E) of preset

stations

PRESET –/+: To select a preset station number (1 to 8)

6 MUTE

Press this button to mute the sound. To cancel mute, press

this button again.

7 VOLUME

These buttons are used to adjust the volume level.

u: To turn up the volume

d: To turn down the volume

8 SLEEP

Press this button to set the SLEEP timer.

9 –/+

These buttons adjust the settings of the SET MENU and

TIME/LEVEL mode.

0 TIME/LEVEL

Press this button to select the items in the TIME/LEVEL

mode.

q Input selector buttons

These buttons select the input source.

CD: To play a CD

TUNER: To listen to an FM or AM broadcast

MD/CD-R: To play an MD or CD recorder (or tape

deck)

DVD: To play a DVD

D-TV/CBL: To watch a TV/digital TV or cable TV

VCR: To play a video cassette

AUX: To use another audio component

V-AUX: To use another audio/video component

w 6CH INPUT

Press this button to play a source connected to the 6CH

INPUT jacks.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

TV VOLUME

TV INPUT

Press

AMP(TUNER).

This section describes basic operation of this unit with the

remote control. First, press AMP(TUNER) on the

component selector. Refer to “PRESET REMOTE

CONTROL” for full details.

0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM6

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

Using the Remote Control

Remote control

sensor

Within approximately 6 m

(20 feet)

e EFFECT

Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center

and rear).

r PRG+, PRG–

Press these buttons to select a DSP program.

Once you press SET MENU, these buttons are used for

selecting the SET MENU item.

t SET MENU

Press this button to select the items in the SET MENU.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be

sure to aim the remote control directly at the infrared sensor

during operation. When the sensor is covered or there is a

large object between the remote control and the sensor, the

sensor cannot receive signals. The sensor may not be able to

receive signals properly when it is exposed to direct sunlight

or a strong artificial light (such as a fluorescent or strobe

light). In this case, change the direction of the light or

reposition the unit to avoid direct lighting.

Notes

• Handle the remote control with care.

• Do not spill water, tea or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following

conditions:

– high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or

bath;

– dusty places; or

– extremely low temperature.

(HTR-5450)

0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM7

Display

ENHANCED

MEMORY SLEEP

PCM

DSP

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

VIRTUAL

DOLBY DTS

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DISCO 5CH STEREO

MONO TV SPORTS

MOVIE THEATER 1 2

ENTERTAINMENT

GAME

CONCERT HALL

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK CONCERT

BASS EXT.

AUTO

STEREO

TUNED

1 t indicator

The “t” indicator lights up when the built-in DTS

decoder is turned on.

2 VIRTUAL indicator

This lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP.

3 g and o indicators

“ g ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital

decoder is on and the signals of the selected source are

encoded with Dolby Digital. “ o ” lights up when

the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on.

4 DSP program indicators

This indicates the name of the selected DSP program.

5 AUTO indicator

This lights up when the unit is in the automatic tuning

mode.

6 STEREO indicator

This lights up when an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient

signal strength is being received.

7 x indicator

“ x ” lights up when the built-in digital sound

field processor is on.

8 v indicator

This lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse

code modulation) digital audio signals.

9 Headphones indicator

This lights up when headphones are connected.

0 Multi-information display

This display shows various information: for example the

name of the selected input source and the various settings

during adjustment with the SET MENU. The current station

frequency and band (FM or AM) also appear when the tuner

is selected as the input source.

q MEMORY indicator

This flashes for about 5 seconds after pressing MEMORY.

During this period, the displayed station can be stored in the

memory.

w TUNED indicator

This lights up when this unit tunes in to a station.

e SLEEP indicator

This lights up while the built-in SLEEP timer is on.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM8

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

Rear Panel

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

As this terminal is used for an

examination in the factory, do

not connect any equipment to

this terminal.

3 4

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN A OR B: 4

MIN. /SPEAKER

B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

SPEAKERS

MAIN

–

R L

–

CENTER REAR

(SURROUND)

–

S VIDEO

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

DVD

D-TV/CBL

VCR 1

OUT

VIDEO SIGNAL

AUDIO SIGNAL

SUB

WOOFER

OUTPUT

VCR 1

OUT

OUT(REC)

IN(PLAY)

AUX

MD/CD-R

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

AM ANT GND

FM ANT

UNBAL.

TUNER

MAIN

CENTER

SUB WOOFER

SURROUND

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

MAIN A OR B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

SWITCHED

100W MAX.

TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

(U.S.A. model)

HTR-5450

HTR-5440

3 4

0 q

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN A OR B: 4

MIN. /SPEAKER

B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

SPEAKERS

MAIN

–

R L

–

CENTER REAR

(SURROUND)

–

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

DVD

D-TV/CBL

VCR 1

OUT

VIDEO SIGNAL

AUDIO SIGNAL

SUB

WOOFER

OUTPUT

VCR 1

OUT

OUT(REC)

IN(PLAY)

AUX

MD/CD-R

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

AM ANT GND

FM ANT

UNBAL.

TUNER

MAIN

CENTER

SUB WOOFER

SURROUND

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

MAIN A OR B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

SWITCHED

100W MAX.

TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

As this terminal is used for an

examination in the factory, do

not connect any equipment to

this terminal.

1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks

2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks

3 6CH INPUT jacks

See pages 12 and 13 for connection information.

4 Antenna input terminals

See page 26 for connection information.

5 Video component jacks

See pages 14 and 15 for connection information.

6 Speaker terminals

See pages 16 and 17 for connection information.

7 AC power cord

Connect to a power outlet.

8 AC OUTLET(S)

Use these outlets to supply power to your other audio/video

components (see page 18).

HTR-5450 only

(U.S.A. model)

9 Audio component jacks

See pages 12 and 13 for connection information.

0 SUBWOOFER jack

See page 17 for connection information.

q IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your

speaker impedance. Set this unit in the standby mode before

you change the setting of this switch (see page 18).

China and General models only

FREQUENCY STEP switch

See page 26.

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

See page 18.

0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM9

SPEAKER SETUP

Speakers to Be Used

This unit is designed to provide the best sound-field quality

with a 5-speaker system, using main speakers, rear speakers

and a center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers

(with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a

moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift

smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the

same manufacture to ensure even tonal quality.

The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus

the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from

your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for

the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for

the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it

is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without

it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.

The main speakers should be high-performance models and

have enough power-handling capacity to accept the

maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers

do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise

sound localization, however, it is ideal to use high-

performance models that can reproduce sounds over the full

range for the center speaker and the rear speakers.

■ Use of a subwoofer expands your

sound field

It is also possible to further expand your system with the

addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective

not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all

channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low frequency

effect) channel with high fidelity when playing back a

source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS. The YAMAHA

Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for

natural and lively bass reproduction.

Speaker Placement

Refer to the following diagram when you place the

speakers.

Main speaker (R)

Center speaker

Main

speaker (L)

Subwoofer

Rear speaker (L)

Rear speaker (R)

1.8 m

■ Main speakers

Place the right and left main speakers an equal distance

from the ideal listening position. The distance of each

speaker from each side of the TV monitor should be the

same.

■ Rear speakers

Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing

slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet) above the

floor.

■ Center speaker

Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face

of your TV monitor. Place the speaker as close to the

monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the

monitor and centrally between the main speakers.

Note

• If the center speaker is not used, the sound will be heard from the

right and left main speakers. In that case, “CENTER SP” in the

SET MENU is set to the NON position.

■ Subwoofer

The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low

bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to

place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly

toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections.

CAUTION

Please use magnetically shielded speakers.

Sometimes a video monitor may be adversely affected

even when magnetically shielded speakers are used.

Separate the speakers from the monitor if this happens.

PREPARATION

0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM10

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

CONNECTIONS

Before Connecting Components

CAUTION

Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been

completed.

Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some

components require different connection methods and have different terminal names. Refer to the instructions for each

component to be connected to this unit.

When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect

it to the jacks with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc.

Use RCA-type pin plug cables for connecting audio/video components with the exception described later.

The input and output jacks for pin plugs can be distinguished as follows:

Yellow video signals (composite)

White analog audio signals for the left channel

Red analog audio signals for the right channel

coaxial digital signals

After completing all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct.

V V

C C

0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:47 PM11

CONNECTIONS

Connecting Audio Components

■ Connecting to digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital

signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can

use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS

bitstreams. When you connect components to both the

COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the

input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input

jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals.

• You can designate the input for each digital jack according to

your component by using “3 I/O ASSIGN” in the SET MENU.

•

All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital

signals.

•

When making connections between the digital signal jacks, you

should connect the components to the same-named analog audio

signal jacks of this unit, because a digital signal cannot be

recorded by a recording component connected to this unit.

• All digital signal input jacks are applicable to sampling

frequencies of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz.

About the dust protection cap

Pull out the cap from the optical jack before

you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not

discard the cap. When you are not using the

optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in

place. This cap protects the jack from dust.

Note

• The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If

you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard,

this unit may not function properly.

■ Connecting a CD player

• The COAXIAL jack is available for a CD player which has

coaxial digital output jack.

• When you connect a CD player to both the analog and digital

jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the digital jack.

HTR-5450 only

HTR-5440 only

■ Connecting an MD recorder, CD

recorder or tape deck

•

When you connect your recording component to both the analog

and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given to the

digital signal.

•

Connect the analog input/output jack of your recording

component to the AUDIO jacks.

Notes

• When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its

power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may

distort the sound from other components.

•

Since digital output and analog output (REC OUT) are

independent of each other, the analog signal is output only to the

analog jack, while the digital signal is output only to the digital

jack.

Connecting an External Decoder

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and

right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an

external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.

Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the

6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right

outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and

surround channels.

Notes

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit

automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you

cannot listen to DSP programs.

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, changing items

of “1 SPEAKER SET” in the SET MENU is not affected (except

“MAIN LVL”).

HTR-5450 only

HTR-5440 only

HTR-5450 only

0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM12

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

S VIDEO

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

DVD

D-TV/CBL

VCR 1

OUT

VIDEO SIGNAL

AUDIO SIGNAL

SUB

WOOFER

OUTPUT

VCR 1

OUT

OUT(REC)

IN(PLAY)

AUX

MD/CD-R

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

AM ANT GND

FM ANT

UNBAL.

TUNER

MAIN

CENTER

SUB WOOFER

SURROUND

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

L R

OUTPUT

COAXIAL

OUTPUT

SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT

CENTER

OUTPUT

MAIN

OUTPUT

SURROUND

OUTPUT

INPUT OUTPUTOUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

INPUT

L R

MD recorder or

CD recorder

CD player

External decoder

(HTR-5450/U.S.A. model)

indicates signal direction

indicates left analog cables

indicates right analog cables

indicates optical cables

indicates coaxial cables

CONNECTIONS

Audio component

0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM13

Connecting Video Components

■ Audio signal jacks

Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), input (IN) and output (OUT) properly.

■ Video signal jacks

Be sure to connect the input (IN) and output (OUT) properly.

■ S VIDEO jacks

If your video component has “S” (high-resolution) video

jacks, they can be connected to this unit’s S VIDEO jacks.

Otherwise, connect the composite video jacks of your video

component to this unit’s composite video jacks.

Notes

• Use a special S VIDEO cable (commercially available) for the S

VIDEO connection.

• If video signals are input from both the S VIDEO input and

composite input jacks, the signals will be directed to their

respective output jacks.

■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

AUDIO OUT R

AUDIO OUT L

VIDEO OUT

OPTICAL OUT

S VIDEO OUT

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

S VIDEO

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

DVD D-TV/CBL

VCR 1

OUT

VIDEO SIGNAL

S VIDEO OUT

S VIDEO

OUT

S VIDEO IN

S VIDEO OUT

DVD player

Video monitor

S Video signal

Signal flow

TV/digital TV,

cable TV or

satellite tuner

VCR

Game console

or camcorder

CONNECTIONS

These jacks are used to connect any video input source such as a game console or camcorder to this unit.

HTR-5450 only

AUDIO OUT R

AUDIO OUT L

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO AUX

VIDEO L AUDIO R

HTR-5450 HTR-5440

Game console

or camcorder

0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM14

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

S VIDEO

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

DVD

D-TV/CBL

VCR 1

OUT

VIDEO SIGNAL

AUDIO SIGNAL

SUB

WOOFER

OUTPUT

VCR 1

OUT

OUT(REC)

IN(PLAY)

AUX

MD/CD-R

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

AM ANT GND

FM ANT

UNBAL.

TUNER

MAIN

CENTER

SUB WOOFER

SURROUND

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

S VIDEO

INPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

AUDIO OUTPUTAUDIO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

INPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

INPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

DVD player

Video monitor

TV/digital TV

or cable

TV/satellite tuner

VCR

indicates signal direction

indicates left analog cables

indicates right analog cables

indicates optical cables

indicates video cables

When using an LD player

Connect the LD player output to the DVD jack.

If the LD player has an OPTICAL digital output jack, connect it to this unit’s OPTICAL DVD jack. If it has analog jacks,

connect it to the analog DVD jacks. If it has an “RF OUTPUT jack” to output a Dolby Digital RF signal (AC-3), use a

commercially available RF demoduclator and connect it to the OPTICAL DVD jack.

If connecting a DVD player and an LD player, connect the LD player to the digital input jack (ex. D-TV/CBL) or the analog

input jack (D-TV/CBL or VCR 1). For details on connections and operations, refer to the operation instructions for the LD

player.

Note that this unit’s remote control can be used to operate the LD player by setting the corresponding manufacturer code for

the DVD/LD mode.

CONNECTIONS

(HTR-5450/U.S.A. model)

indicates S-video cables

HTR-5450 only

0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM15

Connecting Speakers

Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no

sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural

and lack bass.

CAUTION

• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could

damage the unit and/or speakers.

■ Speaker cables

1 Remove approx. 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation

from each of the speaker cables.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together

to prevent short circuits.

CONNECTIONS

Banana plug

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

10 mm (3/8”)

■ Connecting to the MAIN SPEAKERS terminals

1 Unscrew the knob.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of

each terminal.

3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

(U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China and General models only)

• Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the knob

and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the

corresponding terminal.

■ Connecting to the REAR and CENTER SPEAKERS terminals

1 Open the tab.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each

terminal.

3 Return the tab to secure the wire.

(U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China and General models only)

• Banana plug connections are also possible. First, open the tab and

then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the

corresponding terminal.

■ Main speaker terminals

One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of

the SPEAKERS A or B terminals.

■ Rear speaker terminals

A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals.

■ Center speaker terminals

A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.

0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM16

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

■ Subwoofer connection

When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including

the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack.

Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or

rear channels are directed to this jack. (The cut-off

frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency

effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is

decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack.

Notes

• Adjust the subwoofer volume according to the operation

instructions for the subwoofer. (Fine adjustment is possible using

this unit’s output level control of the effect speakers.)

• Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET”, “LFE LEVEL

(5 DOLBY D. SET)” and “6 DTS SET” in the SET MENU, some

signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack.

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN A OR B: 4

MIN. /SPEAKER

B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

SPEAKERS

MAIN

–

R L

–

CENTER REAR

(SURROUND)

–

SUB

WOOFER

OUTPUT

MAIN A OR B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

SWITCHED

100W MAX.

TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

Main speakers A

Right

Left

Main speakers B

Right Left

(HTR-5450/U.S.A.

model)

Center speaker Rear speakers

Right Left

Subwoofer

system

CONNECTIONS

0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM17

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch

WARNING

Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise the unit may be

damaged.

If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not

be fully slid either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode.

Select the right or left position according to the impedance of speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only

when this unit is in the standby mode.

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN A OR B: 4

MIN. /SPEAKER

B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN A OR B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAINS

SWITCHED

100W MAX.

TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN A OR B: 4

MIN. /SPEAKER

B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN A OR B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

SWITCHED

AC OUTLETS

Switch

position

Speaker

Impedance level

Left

Main

If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher.

If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher.

Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.

Right

Main

If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.

[Canada model only]

The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher.

Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the

AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

Connecting the Power Supply Cords

After completing all connections, connect the AC power cord to an AC power outlet. Disconnect the AC power cord if you

will not use this unit for a long period of time.

■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)

U.S.A., Canada, Singapore, China and

General models ................................................. 2 OUTLETS

Australia model ................................................... 1 OUTLET

Use these outlets to connect the power cords only from your

audio/video components to this unit. The power to the AC

OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or

POWER). These outlets will supply power to any connected

component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum

power (total power consumption of components) that can be

connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W (50 W for China

and General models).

(HTR-5450/General model)

IMPEDANCE

SELECTOR

(HTR-5450/U.S.A. model)

To AC outlet

SWITCHED

CONNECTIONS

0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM18

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE

Using the Test Tone

The adjustment of each speaker sound output level should

be performed at your listening position with the remote

control.

1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the

component selector.

2 Press TEST.

“TEST LEFT” appears on the display.

3 Turn up the volume.

You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from each

speaker for about two seconds in following order: left

main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right

rear speaker and left rear speaker. The display changes

as shown below.

Notes

• If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set the unit

in the standby mode and check the speaker connections.

• If the test tone cannot be heard from the center speaker, check the

setting of “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU.

This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level

balance between the main, center and rear speakers by using

the built-in test tone generator. When this adjustment is

performed, the sound output level heard at the listening

position will be the same from each speaker. This is

important for the best performance of the digital sound field

processor, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital

decoder and DTS decoder.

Note

• Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are

connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the

PHONES jack when using the test tone.

Before You Start Adjusting

1 Set the volume at the

minimum level.

2 Turn the power on.

3 Press SPEAKERS A or B

to select the main

speakers to be used.

If you use two main speaker

systems, press both A and B.

4 Set BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE to the

center position.

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

DIGITAL

–

TREBLE

–

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

STANDBY

/ON

VOLUME

STANDBY

/ON

SPEAKERS

OFF

BASS BALANCE

– +

TREBLE

– +

2,6

TEST

LEFT

TEST

RIGHT

TEST L SUR. TEST R SUR.

TEST CENTER

(HTR-5450)

0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM19

4 Adjust BALANCE on the

front panel so that the

sound output level of the

right main speaker and the

left main speaker is the

same.

5 Press –/+ repeatedly to

adjust the output level of

the speaker currently

outputting the test tone so

that it becomes almost the

same as that of the main

speakers.

While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected

speaker.

6 When the adjustment is complete, press TEST.

The test tone stops.

Notes

• If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to the NON position,

the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted in

step 5. The center channel sound is automatically output from the

right and left main speakers.

• For details on adjusting the subwoofer speaker, refer to “DELAY

TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS” on page 37.

• After adjusting with the test tone, it is possible to adjust the

speaker level to taste while listening to the playback of an actual

source. Refer to “DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT

LEVELS” on page 37.

• Once you have completed the adjustments, you can only adjust

the overall volume level of your audio system by using VOLUME

(or VOLUME (u/d)).

• If there is insufficient sound output from the center and rear

speakers, you may decrease the main speaker output level by

setting “MAIN LVL” in the SET MENU to “–10 dB”.

Front panel

BALANCE

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE

0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM20

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

When using the remote control, press AMP(TUNER) on

the component selector.

1 Set the volume at the

minimum level.

2 Turn the power on.

3 Press SPEAKERS A or B

to select the main

speakers to be used.

If you use two main speaker

systems, press both A and B.

PLAYING A SOURCE

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFFON

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

– +

TREBLE

– +

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

1,6

4 Select the desired input source with INPUT

l / h (or the input selector buttons). (Turn on

the video monitor for video sources.)

The name of the selected input source appears on the

display.

To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT

jacks

Press 6CH INPUT so that “6CH INPUT” appears on the

display.

Notes

• An audio source can not be played if “6CH INPUT” appears.

Press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT”.

• If you select and play a video source when “6CH INPUT”

appears, the playback result will be a video image from the video

source and the sound from the audio source selected by using

“6CH INPUT”.

• The current input mode is also shown. Refer to “Input Modes and

Indications” on page 23 for details.

SPEAKERS

OFF

Front panel

VOLUME

Front panel

Remote control

6CH INPUT

Front panel

Input source

BASIC OPERATION

STANDBY

/ON

Front panel Remote control

Remote control

INPUT

Front panel

(HTR-5450)

0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM21

5 Play the source.

Refer to the instructions for the source component (and

“TUNING” for details).

Note

• When controlling an audio/video component (MD recorder, CD

player, DVD player, tape deck, etc.) with the remote control, press

one of the component selector buttons, (TAPE/MD, CD, DVD/

LD, etc.), which corresponds to the component you want to

control. Refer to “PRESET REMOTE CONTROL”.

6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.

If desired, adjust BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, etc.

These controls are only effective for the sound from the

main speakers.

• BASS controls the low-frequency response.

• TREBLE controls the high-frequency response.

• BALANCE adjusts the balance of the output volume

from the right and left main speakers.

7 Use the digital sound field processor.

Refer to “Selecting a DSP Program”.

■ To mute the sound

Use this when you want to temporarily mute audio output.

Press MUTE on the remote

control.

To restore the audio output to

the previous volume level, press

MUTE again.

Note

• During muting, “MUTE ON” appears on the display.

■ When you have finished using this

unit

Press STANDBY/ON (or POWER) to set this

unit in the standby mode.

PLAYING A SOURCE

■ Notes on the digital signal

The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle

96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a

source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and set

the player for digital output. Refer to the operation

instructions for the player.) Note the following when a

96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit:

1. The following indication will appear on the display.

2. DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output

as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and

right main speakers.

Note

• If “MAIN SP” in the SET MENU is set to SMALL and

“BASS OUT” is set to SWFR or “BASS OUT” is set to

BOTH, the sound is also output from the subwoofer.

3. Adjustment of the speaker output level described on

page 37 cannot be made (except the level of the

subwoofer)

■ BGV (background video) function

The BGV function allows you to combine a video image

from a video source with a sound from an audio source.

(For example, you can listen to classical music while you

are watching a video.) This function can only be controlled

with the remote control.

Play a video source, and then select an audio source with

the input selector buttons on the remote control. The BGV

function does not work if you select the audio source with

INPUT l / h on the front panel.

PROGRAM

Front panel

Remote control

VOLUME

Front panel Remote control

BASS BALANCE

–

TREBLE

–

Front panel

PCM

HTR-5450 only

0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM22

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

■ Notes on playing a source

encoded with a DTS signal

• If the digital output data of the player has been processed

in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS

decoding even if you make a digital connection between

this unit and the player.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set

the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces the

noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you want to

play a DTS source, be sure to connect the source to a

digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or

DTS.

• If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing

a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces

no sound.

• The following phenomena may occur if the input mode

is set to AUTO when playing back a source encoded with

DTS:

– If you continue to play a source encoded with a DTS

signal, this unit automatically switches to the “DTS-

decoding” mode to prevent noise from being generated

during subsequent operation. (The “t” indicator

lights up on the display.) The “t” indicator may flash

immediately after playback of a source encoded with a

DTS signal has finished. Only a source encoded with a

DTS signal can be played back while this indicator is

flashing. (The indicator will flash for less than a minute.)

If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the

input mode back to AUTO.

– The “t” indicator may flash when a search or skip

operation is performed. If this status continues for a

certain length of time, the unit will automatically switch

from the “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal

input mode and the “t” indicator will go out.

Input Modes and Indications

When using the remote control, press AMP(TUNER) on

the component selector.

This unit comes with various input jacks. If your component

is connected to more than one type of input jack, you can set

the priority of the input signal.

Press INPUT MODE (or the input selector

button that you have pressed to select the

input source on the remote control) repeatedly

until the desired input mode is shown on the

display.

PLAYING A SOURCE

Front panel

Remote control

Input mode

AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is

automatically selected in the following

order:

1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal

2) Digital (PCM) signal

3) Analog signal

DTS: In this mode, only the digital input

signal encoded with DTS is selected

even if another signal is input at the

same time.

ANALOG (ANLG): In this mode, only the analog input

signal is selected even if a digital

signal is input at the same time.

Notes

• If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack is

selected.

• When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the

type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal,

the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting and

reproduces 5.1 channel source.

• The sound output may be interrupted for some LD players and

DVD players in the following situation:

When the input mode has been set to AUTO and a search is

performed while playing the source encoded with a Dolby Digital

or DTS signal, the sound may delay for a moment when playback

is resumed.

• Depending on the LD player, playback may not be made when

playing an LD that is not digitally recorded with the input mode

set to AUTO. If this happens, set the input mode to ANALOG.

INPUT MODE

0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM23

Selecting a DSP Program

You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a

DSP program. Refer to “SOUND FIELD PROGRAM” for

details about each program.

• Make sure that the sound effect is turned on (see page 25).

■ On the remote control

1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the

component selector.

2 Press PRG+ or PRG–

repeatedly to select the

desired program.

The name of the selected

program appears for a moment

and the selected DSP program

indicator lights up on the

display.

PROGRAM

DSP

DIGITAL

MOVIE THEATER 1

BASS EXT.

PLAYING A SOURCE

DSP program name

■ On the front panel

Press PROGRAM l or h

repeatedly to select the

desired program.

The name of the selected

program appears for a moment

and the selected DSP program

indicator lights up on the

display.

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

– +

TREBLE

– +

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

PROGRAM /

DSP program name

DSP

DIGITAL

MOVIE THEATER 1

BASS EXT.

(HTR-5450)

• If desired, adjust the delay time and the sound output level of each

speaker. (Refer to “DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT

LEVELS” on page 37 for details.)

Notes

• Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and

not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening

room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in

your room to maximize the effect created by the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last DSP program used with that source.

• When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source

and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected

when you turn on the power again.

• If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is

set to AUTO, the DSP program automatically switches to the

appropriate decoding program.

• When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/

NORMAL or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED, no sound will be heard

from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be

heard from the center speaker. However, if “CENTER SP” in the

SET MENU is set to NON, the center channel sound is output

from the main speakers.

• When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jack of this unit is

selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used.

•

When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the

DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is

reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo.

HTR-5450 only

0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 3/28/1, 4:48 PM24

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT

CINEMA

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the sound field

effects of the DSP program without rear speakers. Using

YAMAHA original technology, natural surround

reproduction is possible through the generation of a virtual

speaker.

The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual

CINEMA DSP mode by setting “REAR LR SP” on the SET

MENU to NON. Virtual CINEMA DSP is performed by

using the main speakers.

Note

• This unit is not set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if

“REAR LR SP” is set to NON in the following cases:

– when the 5CH STEREO, PRO LOGIC/NORMAL, DOLBY

DIGITAL/NORMAL or DTS/NORMAL program is selected;

– when the sound effect is turned off;

– when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;

– when the Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is played;

– when using the test tone;

– when connecting the headphones (you will hear SILENT

CINEMA); or

–

when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit.

SILENT CINEMA

SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy the realistic feel of

the DSP program while using headphones. This feature

delivers powerful surround reproduction just as if listening

through the speakers.

You can listen to SILENT CINEMA by connecting your

headphones to the PHONES jack while the effect speakers

are on.

EFFECT

Front panel

PLAYING A SOURCE

Canceling the Sound Effect (turning

off the effect speakers)

Press EFFECT to cancel the sound effect and

monitor only the main sound.

Press EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on.

Notes

• If the sound effect is canceled when Dolby Digital or DTS is

decoding, the sounds of the center and rear channels are mixed

and output from the main speakers.

• If you turn off the sound effect when Dolby Digital or DTS is

decoding, it may happen that the sound is output faintly or not

output normally, depending on the source. In that case, turn back

on the sound effect.

Remote control

HTR-5450 only

0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM25

TUNING

Connecting the Antennas

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal

strength.

Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals.

Indoor FM

antenna

(included)

AM ANT GND

FM ANT

UNBAL.

TUNER

Antenna stand

AM loop

antenna

(included)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and

minimum interference, connect

the antenna GND terminal to a

good earth ground. A good earth

ground is a metal stake driven

into moist earth.

■ Connecting the indoor FM antenna

Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the FM ANT

75Ω UNBAL. terminal.

Note

• Do not connect an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM

antenna at the same time.

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Press and hold the tab to unlock the terminal

hole.

2 Insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the

AM ANT and GND terminals.

3 Release the tab to lock the lead wires.

Lightly pull the lead wires to confirm a good

connection.

4 Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand.

5 Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best

reception is obtained.

• The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and

attached to a wall, etc.

Notes

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer

reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor

reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the

quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer

or service center about the outdoor antennas.

FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General

models only)

Because the interstation frequency spacing

differs in different areas, set the

FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating at the

rear) according to the frequency spacing in

your area.

North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/

10 kHz

Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz

Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC

power plug of this unit from the AC outlet.

100

/10

FM/AM

FREQUENCY

STEP

(U.S.A. model)

0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM26

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

TUNING

Automatic Tuning

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

1 Use INPUT l / h to select

TUNER as the input

source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM

or AM).

“FM” or “AM” appears on the display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so

that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

display.

If “ z ” appears on the display next to the band

indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it

off.

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

– +

TREBLE

– +

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

INPUT

PRESET/TUNING

INPUT

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l once to tune in to a

lower frequency and h once to tune in to a

higher frequency.

Press the button again if the tuning search does not stop

at the desired station.

• Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop

at the desired station (because the signal from the station is weak).

• When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and

the frequency of the received station is shown on the display.

Manual Tuning

If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you

must tune in to it manually.

1 Use INPUT l / h to select

TUNER as input source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM

or AM).

“FM” or “AM” appears on the display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so

that the “AUTO” indicator goes off.

If “ z ” appears on the display next to the band

indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it

off.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to tune in to

the desired station.

To continue the tuning search, hold down the button.

Note

• If you tune in manually to an FM station, it will be automatically

received in monaural mode to increase the signal quality.

Lights up

Turn “ z ” off

Goes off

Turn “ z ” off

(HTR-5450)

0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM27

TUNING

Automatic Preset Tuning (for FM

stations only)

You can make use of the automatic preset tuning function

for FM stations only. This function enables the unit to

automatically tune in with strong signals and to sequentially

store up to 40 FM stations (5 groups x 8 stations).

1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so

that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

display.

3 Hold down MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for

about 3 seconds.

The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO”

indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic

preset tuning begins from the frequency currently

displayed toward the higher frequencies.

Received stations are sequentially stored as A1, A2 ...

A8. If more than 8 stations have been tuned, they are

stored as preset station numbers in other groups (B, C,

D and E) in that order.

■ Automatic preset tuning options

You can select the preset number from which the unit will

store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower

frequencies. Before automatic preset tuning begins (after

pressing MEMORY in step 3),

1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l or h to

select the preset number with which the first station will

be stored. The automatic preset tuning will stop when

stations have all been stored up to E8.

2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn “ z ” off and

then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward

lower frequencies.

■ When automatic preset tuning is

completed

The display shows the frequency of the last preset station.

Check the contents and the number of preset stations by

following the procedure in the section “To Recall a Preset

Station” on page 29.

Notes

• A new setting can be stored in place of the former one.

• The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency.

• You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM

station by simply using the manual preset tuning method.

• Even if the number of received stations is not enough to be stored

up to E8, automatic preset tuning is automatically ended after

searching for all stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored by

automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in

signal strength, tune in to it manually in monaural mode and store

it by using the manual preset tuning method.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode.

If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week,

the memory will be erased. If so, store the stations again

by using preset tuning methods.

Lights up

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

– +

TREBLE

– +

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

213

FM/AM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

BASS EXT.

AUTO

Flashes

(HTR-5450)

0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM28

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

TUNING

Manual Preset Tuning

You can also store up to 40 stations (5 groups x 8 stations)

manually.

1 Tune in to the desired station.

Refer to “Automatic/Manual Tuning” for the tuning

procedure.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.

3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select the

desired group (A to E) of preset stations

before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off.

Make sure that “ z ” appears on the display. The

selected group appears on the display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) with which you

want to store the station before the “MEMORY”

indicator goes off.

Press l to select a lower preset

station number and h to select

a higher preset station number.

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) before the

“MEMORY” indicator goes off.

The displayed station has been stored as the preset

group and number you have selected, and the reception

band and frequency appear and the “TUNED” indicator

lights up on the display.

6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

Notes

• A new setting can be stored in place of the former one.

• The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency.

To Recall a Preset Station

You can recall any desired station simply by selecting the

preset station number with which it was stored.

You can also recall a preset station with the remote control.

Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector and press

TUNER on the input selector.

1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the required group

of preset stations.

Make sure that “ z ” appears on the display.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h (or PRESET

–/+) to select a preset station number (1 to 8).

The preset group and number appear on the display

along with the reception band, frequency, and the

“TUNED” indicator lights up.

PRESET/TUNING

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

– +

TREBLE

– +

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

AUTO

STEREO

TUNED

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

A/B/C/D/E

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

– +

TREBLE

– +

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

2,5

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO

STEREO

TUNED

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

Flashes

Front panel

Remote control

Front panel

Remote control

(HTR-5450)

0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM29

TUNING

Exchanging Preset Stations

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations

with each other.

Example: Exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”

1 Recall preset station “E1”.

Refer to the procedure in the section “To Recall a

Preset Station” on page 29.

2 Hold down (PRESET/

TUNING) EDIT for about

3 second.

“E1” and the “MEMORY”

indicator flash.

3 Recall preset station “A5” by using the buttons

on the front panel.

“A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash.

4 Press (PRESET/TUNING)

EDIT again.

The display shows the

exchange of stations has been

completed.

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

– +

TREBLE

– +

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

2,4

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

BASS EXT.

MEMORY

BASS EXT.

MEMORY

Flashes

(HTR-5450)

0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM30

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

RECORDING A SOURCE

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

–

TREBLE

–

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

1,4

Recording adjustments and other operations are performed

from the recording component. Refer to the instructions for

these components.

Notes

• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record

between other components connected to this unit.

• The DSP program and the setting of VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE

and BALANCE have no effect on the material being recorded.

• A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot

be recorded.

• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT

channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not

output on VCR 1 OUT.)

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records,

CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe

•

Composite video and S video signals pass independently through

this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing

video signals, if your video source component is connected to

provide only an S video (or only a composite video) signal, you

can record only and an S video (or only a composite video) signal

by your VCR.

If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

■ Special considerations when

recording DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being

recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record

sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the

following considerations and adjustments need to be made.

For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS

Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be recorded.

Set the DVD player (or CD player) as described in the

player’s operation instructions so that the audio signals are

output from the player’s analog outputs.

Remote control

INPUT

Front panel

VOLUME

Front panel

VOLUME

Front panel

Remote control

HTR-5450 only

(HTR-5450)

1 Set the volume at the

minimum level.

2 Select the source you want to record.

3 Begin recording by the recording component

connected to this unit.

4 Play the source and then turn up the volume to

confirm the input source.

0106HTR5450/5440_31_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM31

SET MENU

3,6

4,5

ADVANCED OPERATION

1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the

component selector.

2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.

3 Press PRG– (or PRG+) repeatedly to select the

item (1 to 9) you want to adjust.

• By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the

same order as when pressing PRG–.

4 Press – or + once to enter the setup mode of

the selected item.

The last setting you adjusted appears on the display.

Depending on the item, press PRG– (or PRG+) to

select a sub item.

5 Press – or + repeatedly to change the setting

of the item.

6 Press PRG– (or PRG+)

repeatedly until the input

source name appears to

exit from the SET MENU.

The SET MENU consists of 9 items including the speaker

mode setting. Use the SET MENU to enjoy the optimum

audio/video playback for your system.

• You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a

source.

1 SPEAKER SET

CENTER SP

MAIN SP

REAR LR SP

BASS OUT

MAIN LVL

2 HP TONE CTRL

3 I/O ASSIGN

4 INPUT MODE

5 DOLBY D. SET

LFE LEVEL

D-RANGE

6 DTS SET

7 SP DLY TIME

8 DISPLAY SET

9 MEM. GUARD

Adjusting the Items on the SET

Adjustment should be made with the remote control.

Note

• Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting.

0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM32

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

■ MAIN SP (main speaker mode)

Choices: LARGE, SMALL

Initial setting: LARGE

LARGE

Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range

of the left and right main channel signal is directed to the

left and right main speakers.

SMALL

Select this if you have small main speakers. The low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel

are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”.

Note

• When you select MAIN for “BASS OUT”, the low-frequency

signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the

main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker

mode.

■ REAR LR SP (rear speaker mode)

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)

Initial setting: LRG

LRG

Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or if

a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The

entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the left

and right rear speakers.

SML

Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers. The

low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear

channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS

OUT”.

NON

Select this if you do not have rear speakers.

• This unit is set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting

NON for “REAR LR SP”.

SET MENU

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than

one week, the settings of the SET MENU you adjusted

will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust the items

again.

1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode

settings)

Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your

speaker configuration.

Notes

• When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level

adjustments in items of “1 SPEAKER SET” are not affected

(except “MAIN LVL”).

•

When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, level

adjustments in items “MAIN SP”, “BASS OUT” and “MAIN

LVL” are possible, but those in items “CENTER SP” and “REAR

LR SP” are not affected.

■ CENTER SP (center speaker mode)

By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration,

the unit can provide good dialog localization for many

listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)

Initial setting: LRG

LRG

Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire

range of the center channel signal is directed to the center

speaker.

SML

Select this if you have a small center speaker. The low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel

are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”.

NON

Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the

center channel signals are directed to the left and right main

speakers.

HTR-5450 only

0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM33

■ BASS OUT (bass out mode)

LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit

decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency

signals are defined as 90 Hz and below.

Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH

Initial setting: BOTH

SWFR

Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are

directed to the subwoofer.

MAIN

Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals

are directed to the main speakers.

BOTH

Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix the

main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE signals.

Notes

• When playing a 2-channel source (CD, MD, tape, video cassette

etc.), select BOTH position to direct low bass signals (below

90 Hz) to the SUBWOOFER jack.

• When you select SMALL (SML) for items “CENTER SP”,

“MAIN SP” and “REAR LR SP”, the low-frequency signals

(90 Hz and below) from those channels are added to the LFE and

output to the subwoofer.

■ MAIN LVL (main level mode)

Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of

the center and rear speakers with the main speakers because

of the unusually high-efficiency performance of the main

speakers.

Choices: NORM (normal), –10 dB

Initial setting: NORM

NORM (normal)

Normally select this setting.

–10 dB

Select this if you cannot match the output level of your

effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using

the test tone. This setting decreases the main speaker output

level to about one-third of the normal level.

2 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone

control)

Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble

when you use your headphones.

Control range (dB): –6 to +3

Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble)

3 I/O ASSIGN

It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to

be used if this unit’s DIGITAL jack settings (component

names for terminals) differ from that component. This

makes it possible to change the jack assignment and

effectively connect more component.

Once you assign, you can select that component with

INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons).

■ 3A (1) (for the OPTICAL OUTPUT

jack)

Initial setting: (1) MD/CD-R

■ 3B (2) to (4) (for the OPTICAL

INPUT jacks)

Initial settings: (2) MD/CD-R

(3) DVD

(4) D-TV/CBL

SET MENU

HTR-5450

0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM34

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

■ 3C (5) (for the COAXIAL INPUT

jack)

Initial setting: (5) CD

Note

• You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of

jack.

■ 3A (1) and (2) (for the OPTICAL

INPUT jacks)

Initial settings: (1) DVD

(2) D-TV/CBL

■ 3B (3) (for the COAXIAL INPUT

jack)

Initial setting: (3) CD

Note

• You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of

jack.

4 INPUT MODE (initial input mode)

Use this feature to designate the input mode when turning

on the power of this unit with the source component

connected to more than one type of input jacks.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

Initial setting: AUTO

AUTO

Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type

of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.

LAST

Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last

input mode used for that source.

5 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set)

This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby

Digital signals.

■ LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby

Digital signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency

special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes.

Control value (dB): –20 to 0

Initial setting: 0 dB

Notes

• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer.

• Normally, around –6 dB to –8 dB is most suitable for listening at

home.

■ D-RANGE (dynamic range)

Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range (the difference

between the maximum level and the minimum level of

sounds).

Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN

Initial setting: MAX

• Select MAX for feature films.

• Select STD for general use.

• Select MIN for listening to sources at an extremely low

volume level.

SET MENU

Input level

L-LEVEL BST

H-LEVEL CUT

0.0

1.0

MAX

Dialog

level

Input level

Output level

STD

Dialog

level

Output level

MIN

Dialog

level

Output level

Note

• When you select MIN, the sound output may be faint because

some Dolby Digital signals are not compatible with the

minimum-level dynamic range. In this case, select MAX or STD.

HTR-5440

0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 3/28/1, 4:49 PM35

SET MENU

6 DTS SET (DTS LFE level)

This setting is effective only when this unit decodes DTS

signals.

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel when playing back a DTS signal.

The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect

sound which is only added to certain scenes.

Control range (dB): –10 to +10

Initial setting: 0 dB

Note

• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer.

7 SP DLY TIME (center delay)

Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel

sound. This feature works when this unit decodes a Dolby

Digital or DTS signal. Ideally, the center speaker should be

the same distance from the listening position as the left and

right main speakers. However, in most home situations, the

center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers. By

delaying the sound from the center speaker, the apparent

distance from the center speaker to the listening position can

be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance

between the left and right main speakers to the listening

position. Adjusting the delay time for the center speaker is

especially important for giving depth to the dialog.

Control range (ms): 0 to 5

Initial setting: 0 ms

Center speaker image

• Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speaker

about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the actual position of

the center speaker.

8 DISPLAY SET

■ DIMMER

You can adjust the brightness of the display.

Control range : –4 to 0

Initial setting: 0

9 MEM. GUARD (memory guard)

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to the setting

of the SET MENU and other settings on this unit.

Choices: ON, OFF

Initial setting: OFF

Select ON to protect the following features:

• All SET MENU items

• Center, rear speakers and subwoofer levels

• Delay time adjusted by using TIME/LEVEL

Notes

• When “9 MEM. GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test

tone.

• When “9 MEM. GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select any

other SET MENU items.

0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM36

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

When using the digital sound field processor with the Dolby

Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS decoder,

you can adjust the delay time between the main sound and

sound effect, and each speaker’s output level as you wish.

Delay Time

You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of

the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of the

sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the value,

the later the sound effect is generated. The delay time can be

individually adjusted to all DSP programs.

Notes

• Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with some

sources.

• The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay

time.

Program Preset value (ms)

1. CONCERT HALL 45

2. JAZZ CLUB 30

3. ROCK CONCERT 15

4. DISCO 26

5CH STEREO 2

GAME 36

5. TV SPORTS 10

6. MONO MOVIE 69

7. 70 mm SPECTACLE 23

DGTL SPECTACLE 13

DTS SPECTACLE 13

70 mm SCI-FI 20

DGTL SCI-FI 16

DTS SCI-FI 16

8. 70 mm ADVENTURE 20

DGTL ADVENTURE 15

DTS ADVENTURE 15

70 mm GENERAL 20

DGTL GENERAL 15

DTS GENERAL 15

9. PRO LOGIC/NORMAL 20

DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL 5

DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL 5

PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED 20

DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED 5

DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED 5

Sound Output Level of the Center,

Right Rear and Left Rear Speakers,

and Subwoofer

If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of each

speaker even if it has already been adjusted in

“ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE” procedure.

Notes

• If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to the NON position,

the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted.

This is because the center channel sound is automatically output

from the right and left main speakers.

• Once the sound output level has been adjusted, the level will be

the same for all DSP programs.

Speaker Preset value (dB)

Center 0

Right rear 0

Left rear 0

Subwoofer 0

0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM37

DELAY

CENTER

R SUR.

L SUR.

SWFR

DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

Adjusting Method

Adjustments should be performed with the remote control

while watching the information on the display.

1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the

component selector.

2 Press TIME/LEVEL repeatedly to select the

item you want to adjust.

Each time you press TIME/LEVEL, the selected item

changes and appears on the display as below.

Delay time

Center speaker output level

Right rear speaker output level

Left rear speaker output level

Subwoofer output level

Note

• Depending on the setting of the SET MENU, you may not be able

to select all these items.

3 Press – or + to adjust the

delay time or speaker

output levels.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the settings of

any other item.

Notes

• If “CENTER SP” or “REAR LR SP” is set to NON, or “BASS

OUT” is set to MAIN, the output level of that speaker cannot be

adjusted.

• When you adjust the output level with TIME/LEVEL, the settings

you made with the test tone will be changed.

• To adjust speakers other than the subwoofer, the adjusting

procedure using test tones on page 19 is recommended.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode.

If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week,

the latest values for the delay time and the center/rear/

subwoofer output levels that were set will automatically

return to the preset values. If so, adjust the delay time

and output levels again.

0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM38

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

SLEEP TIMER

The SLEEP timer can be used to automatically set this unit

in the standby mode. This timer is useful when you are

going to sleep while enjoying a broadcast or other desired

input source. The SLEEP timer can only be set with the

remote control.

Notes

• First press AMP(TUNER), TAPE/MD, CD or DVD/LD on the

component selector to set the SLEEP timer for this unit.

• The SLEEP timer is effective for the components connected to the

AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit.

Setting the SLEEP Timer

1 Play a source you want to enjoy when you are

going to sleep.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to

select the desired SLEEP

time.

Each time you press SLEEP, the

SLEEP time will change as

below:

3 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the

display after the SLEEP timer has been set.

The display returns to the previous indication.

Canceling the SLEEP Timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”

appears on the display.

It will soon disappear and the “SLEEP” indicator will

go off.

Note

• The SLEEP timer can also be canceled by setting the unit in the

standby mode by using POWER on the remote control (or

STANDBY/ON), or by disconnecting the AC power cord from

the AC power outlet.

120 90 60 30

The SLEEP timer is off

(SLEEP OFF).

(This is the state before

SLEEP is pressed.)

SLEEP

BASS EXT.

Flashes

SLEEP

STEREO

TUNED

Lights up

0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM39

PRESET REMOTE CONTROL

It is possible to control this unit and other YAMAHA A/V components using the remote control supplied with this unit. It is

also possible to control components from other manufacturers (or some YAMAHA components) by setting the proper

manufacturer code (a signal assigned to each manufacturer and component).

Note

• For the notes on batteries, operating distance and names and functions of the remote control, refer to each description in this manual.

Component Selector Buttons

There are eight component selector buttons. Press one of these buttons which corresponds to the component you want to

control with the remote control. For example, if you press CD on the component selector, the remote control is set to the CD

operation mode, allowing the CD player to be controlled.

AMP(TUNER)

You can perform the basic operations of this

unit.

The code for a YAMAHA CD player is

factory set.

DVD/LD & DVD MENU

An LD player can be controlled in

the DVD/LD mode. A DVD player can be

controlled in the DVD/LD and DVD MENU

modes. The code for a YAMAHA DVD

player is factory set.

TAPE/MD

The code for a YAMAHA MD deck is factory

set. (The code for the YAMAHA CD recorder

and tape deck can also be set.)

VCR

A VCR can be controlled.

A TV can be controlled.

CBL/SAT

A cable TV or satellite tuner can be controlled.

Notes

• The button functions on the remote control differ depending on the operation mode. Refer to the following pages for details.

• When shipped from the factory, the YAMAHA manufacturer codes listed on page 49 are set for each dial position. If unable to operate your

YAMAHA A/V component, please try using another YAMAHA code.

Controlling the Components

Connected to This Unit

■ Example: To control YAMAHA CD

player

1 Make sure that the volume is set at the

minimum level.

2 Press AMP(TUNER) on the

component selector.

3 Turn on the power.

4 Press CD on the input selector.

5 Press CD on the

component selector.

6 Press p.

Refer to “Description of Each

Mode” for the CD player

operation buttons.

7 Adjust the volume.

If you set the remote control with the manufacturer codes

listed from page i at the end of this manual, you

can control other brands of components. Refer to

“Setting the Manufacturer Code” for details.

0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM40

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

Description of Each Mode

■ TAPE/MD MODE

Note

• TV VOLUME functions if you have set the code for your TV.

DISPLAY (MD/CD-R)

SLEEP

EFFECT

6CH INPUT

MUTE

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

POWER

This button turns this unit on if you have set the code

for a YAMAHA tape deck, MD recorder or CD

recorder. This button turns on the tape deck, MD

recorder or CD recorder that has a remote control with

a power button if you have set the code.

r REC/PAUSE

This button gives a pause in recording on a tape deck

or MD recorder.

p PLAY

This button plays a tape, an MD or CD-R.

b DIR A (TAPE)

This button selects the playing direction of deck A.

SKIP– (MD/CD-R)

This button skips to the previous track.

w REWIND (TAPE)

This button rewinds a tape.

SEARCH (MD/CD-R)

This button initiates a backward search on the track

that is playing to find the point from which you want

to listen.

Press TAPE/MD.

Input selector buttons

DECK A/B (TAPE)

This button selects deck A or B on a double-cassette

tape deck.

e PAUSE (MD/CD-R)

This button gives a pause in operation.

a DIR B (TAPE)

This button selects the playing direction of deck B.

SKIP+ (MD/CD-R)

This button skips to the next track.

s STOP

This button stops operation on a tape deck, MD

recorder or CD recorder.

f FAST FORWARD (TAPE)

This button winds a tape fast forward.

SEARCH (MD/CD-R)

This button initiates a fast-forward search on the

track that is playing to find the point from which you

want to listen.

• The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.

• Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control

supplied with your component.

PRESET REMOTE CONTROL

0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM41

■ CD MODE

Note

• TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV.

DISPLAY

SLEEP

EFFECT

6CH INPUT

MUTE

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

TV INPUT

Press CD.

POWER

This button turns this unit on if you have set the code

for a YAMAHA CD player. This button turns on the CD

player that has a remote control with a power button if

you have set the code.

p PLAY

This button plays a CD.

b SKIP–

This button skips to the beginning of the previous

track.

w SEARCH

This button initiates a backward search on the track

that is playing to find the point from which you want

to listen.

Input selector buttons

DISC SKIP –/+ (for a CD player with CD

changer)

These buttons skip to the next or previous CD.

e PAUSE

This button gives a pause in operation. The

button functions as PAUSE/STOP* for operating

a YAMAHA CD player under factory setting.

a SKIP+

This button skips to the beginning of the next

track.

s STOP

This button stops operation. The button functions

as PAUSE/STOP* for operating YAMAHA CD

players.

f SEARCH

This button initiates a fast-forward search on the

track that is playing to find the point from which

you want to listen.

PAUSE/STOP function

Press the button once to give a pause

in operation and press once more to

stop operation.

• The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.

• Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control

supplied with your component.

PRESET REMOTE CONTROL

0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM42

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

■ DVD/LD MODE

Note

• TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV.

CLEAR

TV INPUT

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

RETURN

MENU UP

MUTE

MENU LEFT

MENU DOWN

TITLE

DISC SKIP –/+

INDEX

MENU SELECT

+10

MENU RIGHT

EFFECT

TV INPUT

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

SLEEP

MUTE

SKIP –

STOP

DISC SKIP –/+

6CH INPUT

DISPLAY

PAUSE

PLAY

SKIP +

Press DVD/LD.

POWER

This button turns this unit on if you have

set the code for a YAMAHA DVD or LD

player. This button turns on the DVD or

LD player that has a remote control with a

power button if you have set the code.

■ DVD MENU MODE

Notes

• TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV.

• DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players.

Input selector buttons

Press DVD MENU.

POWER

This button turns this unit on if you have

set the code for a YAMAHA DVD or LD

player. This button turns on the DVD or

LD player that has a remote control with

a power button if you have set the code.

Numeric buttons

• The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.

• Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control

supplied with your component.

PRESET REMOTE CONTROL

0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM43

■ VCR MODE

Note

• TV VOLUME, TV INPUT and TV SLEEP function if you have

set the code for your TV.

EFFECT

TV INPUT

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

TV SLEEP

MUTE

VCR STOP

VCR REWIND

VCR CHANNEL –/+

DISPLAY

VCR PAUSE

VCR PLAY

VCR

FAST FORWARD

CHANNEL

ENTER

CHANNEL

VCR POWER

+100

TV INPUT

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

TV SLEEP

MUTE

MENU LEFT

MENU UP

MENU DOWN

RECALL

CBL/SAT

CHANNEL –/+

DISPLAY

MENU SELECT

CHANNEL

ENTER

MENU RIGHT

CBL/SAT POWER

CHANNEL

EFFECT

TV INPUT

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

TV SLEEP

TV MUTE

VCR STOP

VCR REWIND

TV CHANNEL –/+

DISPLAY

VCR PAUSE

VCR PLAY

VCR

FAST FORWARD

CHANNEL

ENTER

CHANNEL

TV POWER

VCR REC

Press this button twice to

start recording.

■ CBL/SAT MODE

Note

• TV VOLUME, TV INPUT and TV SLEEP function if you have

set the code for your TV.

Press VCR.

Press CBL/SAT.

■ TV MODE

Note

• You can control your VCR if you have set the

code for it.

Press TV.

VCR REC

Press this button twice.

• The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.

• Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control

supplied with your component.

PRESET REMOTE CONTROL

0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM44

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

Setting the Manufacturer Code

You can set the code for the manufacturer of your

component after pressing the component selector buttons

other than AMP(TUNER).

1 Turn on your component to be used.

2 Press one of the

component selector

buttons which

corresponds to the

component to be

controlled.

3 Press both VOLUME

buttons (u/d) at the same

time for about four

seconds.

The indicator flashes twice.

4 Use the numeric buttons to

enter the four-digit

manufacturer code for the

component to be used.

Make sure that the

indicator flashes twice.

If the indicator does not flash,

repeat step 3 and re-enter the

code.

5 Press POWER (or any other button) on the

remote control to check if you have set the

code correctly.

If your component cannot be

controlled with the remote

control, try setting another code

for the same manufacturer.

Notes

• You can set only one code for one mode.

• In the DVD/LD and DVD MENU modes:

Be sure to press DVD/LD on the component selector before

entering the code for the DVD/LD player. You cannot set the code

for a DVD player after pressing DVD MENU on the component

selector. The code set in the DVD/LD mode is also

simultaneously set in the DVD MENU mode.

• If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for

the manufacturer, use the original remote control supplied with

your component.

■ To use a second (and third) VCR

You can control a second (and third) VCR in the CBL/SAT

and DVD MENU modes if a cable TV or satellite tuner, or

DVD player is not being used.

Note

• In order to set a second (and third) VCR in the DVD MENU

mode, it is necessary to first set up the code for an LD player in

the DVD/LD mode.

1 Turn on the VCR to be used.

2 Press CBL/SAT or DVD

MENU on the component

selector.

3 Press both VOLUME

buttons (u/d) at the same

time for about four

seconds.

The indicator flashes twice.

4 Use the numeric buttons to

enter the four-digit code

for the second (and third)

VCR. Make sure that the

indicator flashes twice.

If the indicator does not flash,

repeat step 3 and re-enter the

code.

5 Press POWER (or any other button) on the

remote control to check if you have set the

code correctly.

If the VCR cannot be controlled

with the remote control, try

setting another code for the

same manufacturer.

PRESET REMOTE CONTROL

0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM45

Returning to the Factory Setting

■ To return to the factory-set codes

in all modes

1 Press one of the

component selector

buttons other than

AMP(TUNER).

2 Press both VOLUME

buttons (u/d) at the same

time for about four

seconds.

The indicator flashes twice.

3 Enter the code number

“9990”.

Make sure that the indicator

flashes twice.

■ To return to the factory-set codes

in each mode

1 Press one of the

component selector

buttons which

corresponds to the

component to be returned

to the factory-set code.

2 Press both VOLUME

buttons (u/d) at the same

time for about four

seconds.

The indicator flashes twice.

3 Enter the code number

“0000”.

Make sure that the indicator

flashes twice.

PRESET REMOTE CONTROL

The following codes are factory set.

Component selector button Component Code Set component Set code

TV TV 0101

CBL/SAT Cable TV 0006

VCR VCR 0002

DVD/LD DVD player 0008 (YAMAHA DVD player)

CD CD player 0005 (YAMAHA CD player)

TAPE/MD MD recorder 0024 (YAMAHA MD recorder)

We recommend that you write all the code numbers you have set on the table above.

0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM46

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

2 JAZZ CLUB —

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

A digital sound field processor (DSP) based on the latest YAMAHA technology is built into this unit. It is possible to play

back various sound fields for the source you are listening to.

Note

• Regardless of the program name and characteristics listed in the table below, select the sound field program that sounds best to you.

Hi-Fi DSP Programs

■ For audio sources: Nos. 1 to 4

No. Program (group) Sub-program Features

1 CONCERT HALL —

Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field

suitable for background music at parties.

Note

• Reverberations (sound effects) for realizing the sound field and unprocessed stereo from the left and right main speakers is output. The

sound is not output from the center speaker. (The sound is output when one of these programs is selected while playing a source encoded

with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. If 5CH STEREO is selected, the sound is output from all speakers regardless of the input source.)

This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz

club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a

real and vibrant sound.

A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from

all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of

presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage.

3 ROCK CONCERT —

The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was

recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of

the hall.

4 ENTERTAINMENT DISCO

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big

city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-

energy, “immediate” sound.

5CH STEREO

CINEMA DSP Programs

■ For audio-video sources: Nos. 4 to 6

No. Program (group) Sub-program Features

4 ENTERTAINMENT GAME

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.

5 TV SPORTS — Although the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field

employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you can

enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs

or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is

oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium

spread on the surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained.

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old

movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by

using only the presence sound field.

6 MONO MOVIE —

0109HTR5450/5440_47-49_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM47

8 MOVIE THEATER 2 ADVENTURE 70 mm

ADVENTURE

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the

sound design of the newest 70-mm and

multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is

made to be similar to that of the newest movie

theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field

itself are restrained as much as possible.

GENERAL 70 mm GENERAL This program is for reproducing sounds from

70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is

characterized by a soft and extensive sound field.

The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It

spatially spreads all around and toward the screen,

restraining the echo effect of conversations without

losing clarity. For the surround sound field, the

harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully in a

wide space at the rear of the sound field.

DOLBY DIGITAL/

NORMAL

DTS DIGITAL

SUR./

ENHANCED

Analog, PCM,

Dolby Digital

in 2-channel

DGTL

ADVENTURE

Dolby Digital

(5.1-channel)

DTS ADVENTURE DTS

Analog, PCM,

Dolby Digital

in 2-channel

DGTL GENERAL Dolby Digital

(5.1-channel)

DTS GENERAL DTS

9 q/DTS

SURROUND

NORMAL PRO LOGIC/

NORMAL

Analog, PCM,

Dolby Digital

in 2-channel

Dolby Digital

(5.1-channel)

DTS DIGITAL

SUR./NORMAL

DTS

The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds

and sound effects from sources.

The highly efficient decoding process improves

crosstalk and channel separation, and makes sound

positioning smoother and more precise.

In this program, the digital sound field processor is

not turned on.

ENHANCED PRO LOGIC/

ENHANCED

Analog, PCM,

Dolby Digital

in 2-channel

DOLBY DIGITAL/

ENHANCED

Dolby Digital

(5.1-channel)

DTS

This program ideally simulates the multi-surround

speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby

Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or

DTS decoding and digital sound field processing

create precise effects without altering the original

sound orientation.

The surround effects produced by this sound field

wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to

the left and right, and toward the screen.

■ For movie programs: Nos. 7 to 9

No. Program (group) Sub-program Input source Features

7 MOVIE THEATER 1 SPECTACLE 70 mm

SPECTACLE

This program creates the extremely wide sound

field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely

reproduces the source sound in detail, making both

the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is

ideal for any kind of video source encoded with

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially

large-scale movie productions).

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

Analog, PCM,

Dolby Digital

in 2-channel

DGTL

SPECTACLE

Dolby Digital

(5.1-channel)

DTS SPECTACLE DTS

SCI-FI 70 mm SCI-FI Analog, PCM,

Dolby Digital

in 2-channel

This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound

effects in the latest sound form of science fiction

films, thus creating a broad and expansive

cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy

science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field

that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and

DTS-encoded software employing the most

advanced techniques.

DGTL SCI-FI Dolby Digital

(5.1-channel)

DTS SCI-FI DTS

Notes

• The “ x ” indicator does not light up when selecting the sub-program “NORMAL” of the q/DTS SURROUND program.

• If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to NON, no sound is output from the center speaker.

• The effect sound is output from the main speakers when a monaural source is played with CINEMA DSP program groups 4 (GAME) and 5

to 8.

0109HTR5450/5440_47-49_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM48

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

Presence DSP

sound field

Surround DSP

sound field

■ MOVIE THEATER 1 and 2

Most commercially available movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by

Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic

decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend

to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes.

The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using

matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER 70 mm programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization

that 6-channel soundtracks do.

When the input source is analog, PCM or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2-channel

These programs express an immense sound field and a large

surround effect. They also give depth to the sound from the

main speakers to recreate the realistic sound of a Dolby Stereo

theater.

70 mm SPECTACLE

70 mm SCI-FI

70 mm ADVENTURE

70 mm GENERAL

The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home.

With the unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a

public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology.

When the input source is encoded with Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) or DTS (Tri-Field CINEMA DSP)

These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on

each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left

surround and right surround channels. This processing enables

this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround

expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTS-equipped movie theater

without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels.

DGTL SPECTACLE

DTS SPECTACLE

DGTL SCI-FI

DTS SCI-FI

DGTL ADVENTURE

DTS ADVENTURE

DGTL GENERAL

DTS GENERAL

Presence DSP

sound field

Right surround DSP

sound field

Left surround DSP

sound field

• If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically switched to

the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field.

0109HTR5450/5440_47-49_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM49

TROUBLESHOOTING

Refer to the chart below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or

if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord and contact the nearest

authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

Problem Cause Remedy

APPENDIX

Refer to

page

The unit fails to turn on

when STANDBY/ON (or

POWER) is pressed, or

enters in the standby

mode soon after the

power has been turned

on.

The power cord is not connected or the plug is

not completely inserted.

Firmly connect the power cord.

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the

rear panel is not fully set to the left or right

position.

Set the switch fully to the left or right position

when the unit is in the standby mode.

The protection circuit has been activated.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on this

unit and on all speakers are secure and that the

wire for each connection does not touch

anything other than its respective connection.

No sound and/or no

picture.

Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

An appropriate input source has not been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with INPUT

l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector

buttons).

The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.

The main speakers to be used have not been

selected properly.

Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A

and/or B.

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

The sound is muted.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel

a mute and adjust the volume.

Digital signals other than PCM audio, Dolby

Digital or DTS signal which this unit cannot

reproduce are being input to this unit by playing

a CD-ROM, etc.

Play a source whose signals this unit can

reproduce.

The picture does not

appear.

The output and input for the video are

connected to different types of video jacks.

Make connections using the same type of jack

(between composites, S-VIDEOs, or

components) for both the input and output.

The sound suddenly

goes off.

Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is

set to the appropriate position and then turn the

unit back on.

The protection circuit has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check the speaker wires are not touching each

other and then turn the unit back on.

16, 17

12 – 15

16, 17

—

14, 15

16, 17

HTR-5450 only

The sleep timer has functioned.

Turn on the power, and play the source again.

The sound is muted.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel

a mute and adjust the volume.

Only the speaker on one

side can be heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

12 – 17

0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM50

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

TROUBLESHOOTING

No sound from the effect

speakers.

The sound effect is off.

Press EFFECT to turn it on.

A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS

decoding DSP program is being used with

material not encoded with Dolby Surround,

Dolby Digital or DTS.

Select another DSP program.

A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input

to this unit.

No sound from the

center speaker.

The output level of the center speaker is set to

minimum.

Raise the level of the center speaker.

“CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to

NON.

Select the appropriate mode for your center

speaker.

One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4) has been

selected.

Select another DSP program.

The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or

DTS signal does not have a center channel

signal.

No sound from the rear

speakers.

The output level of the rear speakers is set to

minimum.

Raise the output level of the rear speakers.

A monaural source is being played with the

program 9.

Select another DSP program.

No sound from the

subwoofer.

“BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to

MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is

being played.

Select SWFR or BOTH.

“BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to

SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is

being played.

Select BOTH.

The source does not contain low bass signals

(90 Hz and below).

Poor bass reproduction.

“BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to

SWFR or BOTH and your system does not

include a subwoofer.

Select MAIN.

47, 48

—

47, 48

—

HTR-5450 only

The output mode for each speaker (main, center

or rear) in the SET MENU does not match your

speaker configuration.

Select the appropriate output mode for each

speaker based on the size of the speakers in

your configuration.

A “humming” sound can

be heard.

Incorrect cable connections.

Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

33, 34

12 – 15

0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM51

TROUBLESHOOTING

12 – 15

The volume level cannot

be increased, or the

sound is distorted.

The component connected to the REC OUT

jacks of this unit is turned off.

Turn on the power to the component.

The effect and surround

sounds cannot be

recorded.

It is not possible to record the effect and

surround sounds by a recording component.

A source cannot be

recorded.

An analog source is being input during digital

recording.

Input a digital source.

The settings of the SET

MENU and some other

settings on this unit

cannot be changed.

“9 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU is set

to ON.

Select OFF.

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been frozen by

an external electric shock (such as lightning or

excessive static electricity) or by a power

supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet

and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

The sound is degraded

when listening with

headphones connected

to a tape deck or CD

player that is connected

to this unit.

This unit is in the standby mode.

Turn on the power of the unit.

There is noise

interference from digital

or high-frequency

equipment, or the unit.

Move the unit further away from such

equipment.

—

Refer to

page

The unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

Problem Cause Remedy

—

A source component and recording

component are not digitally connected to the

unit.

Make digital connections.

A digital source is being input during analog

recording.

Input an analog source.

A source component and recording

component are not analog connected to the

unit.

Make analog connections.

HTR-5450 only

0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM52

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

After this unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) or if you

mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect

the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating.

TROUBLESHOOTING

—

■ Tuner

Problem

FM stereo reception

is noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts

may cause this problem when the transmitter is

too far away or the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

There is distortion,

and clear reception

cannot be obtained

even with a good FM

antenna.

There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multipath interference.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in

with the automatic

tuning method.

The station is too weak.

Use the manual tuning method.

Previously preset

stations can no

longer be tuned in.

The unit has been disconnected for a long

period.

Re-store the stations.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is weak or the antenna connections

are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and

orient it for best reception.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

There are buzzing and

whining noises

(especially in the

evening).

Cause

Remedy

Refer to

page

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This

will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps,

motors, thermostats and other electrical

equipment.

A TV set is being used nearby.

Move this unit away from the TV.

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

The remote control does

not work nor function

properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more

than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type

of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote

control sensor of this unit.

Reposition the unit.

The batteries are weak.

Replace all batteries with new ones.

The unit or other

component cannot be

controlled.

The component to be controlled has not been

selected.

Press one of the component selector buttons,

corresponding to the component to be

controlled.

The remote control cannot control system

components.

The manufacturer code has not been set up

properly.

Enter the code again.

Try setting another code for the same

manufacturer.

Depending on the manufacturer or the model,

some components cannot be controlled with this

unit’s remote control even though the code has

been set up properly.

Use the original remote control supplied with

your component.

—

■ Remote control

Use the manual tuning method.

Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM53

SPECIFICATIONS (HTR-5450)

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Australia, Singapore, China and General models]

....................................................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)

Mono/Stereo ............................. 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf)

• Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz) ..................................... 70 dB

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ...................................................................... 0.2%/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ............................................................ 48 dB

• Frequency Response ............................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2.0 dB

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 530 to 1710 kHz

[Australia and Singapore models] ............................ 531 to 1611 kHz

[China and General models]

10 kHz step ............................................................ 530 to 1710 kHz

9 kHz step .............................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity .................................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................... AC 120 V/60 Hz

[Australia model] ..................................................... AC 240 V/50 Hz

[Singapore model] ................................................... AC 230 V/50 Hz

[China model] .......................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz

[General model] ............................. AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. model] ......................................................................... 240 W

[Australia, Singapore, China and General models]

............................................................................................... 250 W

[Canada model] ........................................................... 250 W/320 VA

Standby Mode

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................ 0.90 W

[Australia and Singapore models] ........................................ 0.96 W

• Maximum Power Consumption

[General model only]

5CH, 10% THD ........................................................................ 500 W

• AC Outlets

2 (SWITCHED)

[U.S.A., Canada and Singapore models] .... Total 100 W maximum

[China and General models] ......................... Total 50 W maximum

1 (SWITCHED)

[Australia model] ........................................ Total 100 W maximum

• Dimension (W x H x D) ....................................... 435 x 151 x 390 mm

• Weight ....................................................................................... 10.0 kg

• Accessories ................................................................... Remote Control

........................................................................................... Batteries

............................................................................. AM loop antenna

.......................................................................... Indoor FM antenna

...................................................................... Quick Reference Card

............................................................................ Connection Guide

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................... 80 W

[Singapore, China and General models] ................................. 70 W

• Maximum power

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 ohms ....................................................... 100 W

• Maximum Power (EIAJ)

[China and General models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms ........................................................ 100 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 ohms

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 105/125/145/165 W

[China and General models] .............................. 95/115/135/155 W

• Damping Factor

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms ................................................... 60 or more

• Frequency Response

CD, etc. to Main L/R (1 kHz, 150 mV, 8 ohms)

................................................................ 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

CD, etc. to Main L/R (Effect Off, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 30 W, 8 ohms)

.................................................................................. 0.025% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

CD, etc. to Main L/R (Effect Off, 250 mV, shorted)

................................................................................ 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Main L/R ..................................................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation

CD, etc. to MAIN L/R (1 kHz) .................................................. 60 dB

(10 kHz) ................................................ 45 dB

• Tone Control (Main L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz

• Phones Output .......................................................... 490 mV/390 ohms

• Input Sensitivity

CD, etc ................................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms

6CH INPUT ........................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms

• Maximum Input Signal

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................................ 2.2 V or more

• Output Level

REC OUT ............................................................. 150 mV/1.2 kohms

SUBWOOFER ......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] .......................... NTSC

[Australia and Singapore models] ............................................... PAL

• Composite Video Signal Level .................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

• S-Video Signal Level

Y ............................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

C ........................................................................ 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms

• Signal to Noise Ratio ...................................................... 50 dB or more

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Composite, S-Video ...................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM54

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

SPECIFICATIONS (HTR-5440)

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ...................................... 65 W

• Maximum power

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 ohms

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................... 80 W

[Europe, U.K., Australia, Singapore, China and

General models] ...................................................................... 75 W

• DIN Standard Output Power

[Europe model only]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms ......................................................... 95 W

• IEC Output Power

[Europe model only]

1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ....................................................... 67 W

• Maximum Power (EIAJ)

[China and General models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms .......................................................... 95 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 ohms

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 95/115/135/155 W

[China and General models] .............................. 90/110/130/150 W

• Damping Factor

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms ................................................... 60 or more

• Frequency Response

CD, etc. to MAIN L/R .................................. 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

CD, etc. to MAIN L/R (Effect Off, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 30 W, 8 ohms)

.................................................................................. 0.025% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

CD, etc. to MAIN L/R (Effect Off, 250 mV, shorted)

................................................................................ 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Main L/R ..................................................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation

CD, etc. to MAIN L/R (1 kHz) .................................................. 60 dB

(10 kHz) ................................................ 45 dB

• Tone Control (Main L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz

• Phones Output .......................................................... 470 mV/390 ohms

• Input Sensitivity

CD, etc ................................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms

6CH INPUT ........................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms

• Maximum Input Signal

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................................ 2.2 V or more

• Output Level

REC OUT ............................................................. 150 mV/1.2 kohms

SUBWOOFER ......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] .......................... NTSC

[Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models] ........................ PAL

• Composite Video Signal Level .................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

• Signal to Noise Ratio ...................................................... 50 dB or more

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Composite ...................................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Europe, U.K., Australia, Singapore, China and

General models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)

Mono/Stereo ............................. 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf)

• Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz) ..................................... 70 dB

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ...................................................................... 0.2%/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ............................................................ 48 dB

• Frequency Response ............................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2.0 dB

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 530 to 1710 kHz

[Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models] ..... 531 to 1611 kHz

[China and General models]

10 kHz step ............................................................ 530 to 1710 kHz

9 kHz step .............................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity .................................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................... AC 120 V/60 Hz

[Australia model] ..................................................... AC 240 V/50 Hz

[Europe, U.K., and Singapore models] ................... AC 230 V/50 Hz

[China model] .......................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz

[General model] ............................. AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. model] ......................................................................... 200 W

[Canada model] .......................................................... 210 W/280 VA

[Europe, U.K., Australia, Singapore China and General models]

............................................................................................... 210 W

Standby Mode

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................ 0.90 W

[Europe, U.K., Australia, Singapore and China models] ..... 0.96 W

• Maximum Power Consumption

[General model only]

5-ch, 10% THD ........................................................................ 480 W

• AC Outlets

2 (SWITCHED)

[U.S.A., Canada and Singapore models] .... Total 100 W maximum

[China and General models] ......................... Total 50 W maximum

1 (SWITCHED)

[Australia model] ........................................ Total 100 W maximum

• Dimension (W x H x D) ....................................... 435 x 151 x 390 mm

• Weight ......................................................................................... 9.5 kg

• Accessories ................................................................... Remote Control

........................................................................................... Batteries

............................................................................. AM loop antenna

.......................................................................... Indoor FM antenna

...................................................................... Quick Reference Card

............................................................................ Connection Guide

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM55

GLOSSARY

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording

system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects:

two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel

for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound

within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. With

three front channels (left, center and right), and two rear

stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five full-range

audio channels. With an additional channel especially for

bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system

has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel).

Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more

accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The

wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume)

reproduced by the five full-range channels and the precise

sound orientation generated using digital sound processing

provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and

realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to

a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your

enjoyment.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has

developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the

depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS

digital surround in your home. This system is practically

distortion-free, clear 6-channel sound (technically, a left,

right and center channels, two rear channels, plus an LFE

0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels).

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The

frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This

channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low

frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by

the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel

systems.

■ CINEMA DSP

DIGITAL

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally

designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in

a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic

effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall

material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so

widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound

heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data,

YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound

field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital

and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience

of movie theater in the listening room of your own home.

■ SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound

field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm

that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects

even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear

speakers.

It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a

minimum two-speaker system that does not include a center

speaker.

0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM56

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

■ S VIDEO signal

With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as

the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S

VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and

allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio

signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using

any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs

and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for

sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of

time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog

signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for

recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times

the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling

frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the

sound level into a numeric value is called the number of

quantized bits.

The range of rates that can be played back is determined

based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by the

number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the

sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that

can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized

bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced.

■ I/O ASSIGN (SET MENU)

Although component is normally connected according to

jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a

function that assigns jacks according to the component

being connected. If the component being used differs from

the component name shown for this unit’s digital jacks, it is

possible to assign jacks according to the component being

connected. This makes it possible to change the jack

assignment and effectively connect more component.

GLOSSARY

HTR-5450 only

0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM57

INDEX

AC outlets ...................................................................................... 18

Antennas ........................................................................................ 26

BALANCE .................................................................................... 22

BGV function ................................................................................ 22

CBL/SAT mode ............................................................................. 44

CD mode ........................................................................................ 42

CINEMA DSP ......................................................................... 47, 56

Connections

Antennas ................................................................................. 26

Audio components (MD recorder, CD recorder and

CD player) .............................................................................. 12

External decoder ..................................................................... 12

Power supply cords ................................................................ 18

Speakers ................................................................................. 16

Video components (DVD player, VCR and

TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner) ............................. 14

Delay time ..................................................................................... 37

Display ............................................................................................. 8

DISPLAY SET (SET MENU) ....................................................... 36

DOLBY D. SET (SET MENU)

D-RANGE .............................................................................. 35

LFE LEVEL ........................................................................... 35

Dolby Digital ................................................................................. 56

Dolby Surround (Dolby Pro Logic) ............................................... 56

DSP program

CINEMA DSP program .......................................................... 47

Hi-Fi DSP program ................................................................. 47

DTS ............................................................................................... 56

DTS SET (SET MENU) ................................................................ 36

Dust protection cap ........................................................................ 12

DVD/LD mode .............................................................................. 43

DVD MENU mode ........................................................................ 43

External decoder ............................................................................ 12

Front panel ....................................................................................... 4

HP TONE CTRL (SET MENU) .................................................... 34

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch ............................................... 18

INPUT MODE (SET MENU) ....................................................... 35

Input modes ................................................................................... 23

I/O ASSIGN (SET MENU) ..................................................... 34, 57

LFE .................................................................................... 35, 36, 56

Manufacturer codes .................................................................... 45, i

Memory back-up ............................................................... 28, 33, 38

MEM. GUARD (SET MENU) ...................................................... 36

Muting ........................................................................................... 22

Package contents ............................................................................. 3

PCM ............................................................................................... 57

Playing ........................................................................................... 21

Power supply cords ....................................................................... 18

Preset stations

Exchanging preset station ....................................................... 30

To recall a preset station ......................................................... 29

Presetting tuning

Automatic preset tuning ......................................................... 28

Manual preset tuning .............................................................. 29

Rear panel ........................................................................................ 9

Recording ...................................................................................... 31

Remote control

Basic operation ......................................................................... 6

Batteries .................................................................................... 3

Operation range ........................................................................ 7

Setup codes ............................................................................. 45

Sampling frequency (HTR-5450 only) .................................... 22, 57

SET MENU ................................................................................... 32

SILENT CINEMA ................................................................... 25, 56

Sleep timer ..................................................................................... 39

SP DLY TIME (SET MENU) ........................................................ 36

Speaker

Output levels (TIME/LEVEL mode) ...................................... 37

Placement ............................................................................... 10

Output balance (test tone) ...................................................... 19

SPEAKER SET (SET MENU)

BASS OUT ............................................................................. 34

CENTER SP ........................................................................... 33

MAIN LVL ............................................................................. 34

MAIN SP ................................................................................ 33

REAR LR SP .......................................................................... 33

Subwoofer ..................................................................................... 17

S VIDEO (HTR-5450 only) .......................................................... 57

TAPE/MD mode ............................................................................ 41

Test tone ........................................................................................ 19

Tuning

Automatic tuning .................................................................... 27

Manual tuning ........................................................................ 27

TV mode ........................................................................................ 44

VCR mode ..................................................................................... 44

Virtual CINEMA DSP ............................................................. 25, 56

0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 3/28/1, 4:50 PM58

A-Mark 1161

A Tandy 0941

Abex 1151

Admira 1141

Adventura 1131

Aiko 1121

Akai 0331, 1101, 1111

Alba 0431

Alleron 1091

Ambassador 1081

Amstrad 0481, 1081

Anam 0251, 1041, 1051,

1061, 1071

Anam National 1041

AOC 0361, 1021, 1031,

1111, 1161

Archer 1161

Audiosonic 1001

Audiovox 1051, 1161

Aiwa 1481

Bauer 0441

Baur 1001

Beijing 1511, 1551, 1561

Belcor 1031

Bell & Howell 0981, 0991

Beon 1001

Bradford 1051

Brockwood 1031

Broksonic 1161

Bush 1001

Candle 0351, 0361, 0961,

0971, 1111, 1131

Capehart 1021

Carver 0101

Cathay 1001

Celebrity 0951

Centurion 0411

Changhong 1541, 1551, 1561,

1621

Citizen 0351, 0361, 0921,

0931, 0941, 0961,

0971, 1111, 1121,

1131

Clairtone 1011

Clarivox 1001

Concerto 0351, 0971

Conrowa 1751

Contec 0901, 0911, 1011,

1051

Corando 0941

Craig 0251, 1051

Crown 0941, 1051

Curtis Mathes 0161, 0361, 0931,

0941, 0981, 1111

CXC 1051

Daewoo 0291, 0301, 0331,

0721, 0941, 1001,

1031, 1121, 1191,

1531, 1581, 1591,

1601

Dansai 1001

Daytron 0941, 1031

Decca 0271, 1001

Dixi 0331, 1001, 1071

Dumont 0891, 1031

Dynatech 0881

Electroband 0951, 1011

Electrohome 0941

Electron 0941

Elin 1001

Elta 0331

Emerson 0001, 0021, 0061,

0071, 0081, 0091,

0111, 0811, 0821,

0831, 0841, 0851,

0861, 0871, 0901,

0921, 0941, 0981,

1011, 1031, 1051,

1081, 1091

Envision 0361, 1111

Erres 1001

Etron 0331

Ferguson 1001

Finlux 1001

Fisher 0171, 0801, 0981

Formenti 0441

Formonti 1001

Fortress 1141

Fujitsu 1091

Funai 1051, 1091, 1501,

1521

Futuretech 1051

GE 0131, 0161, 0201,

0751, 0761, 0771,

0781, 0791, 0811,

0861, 1041

GEC 0271, 1001

Gemini 0391

Genexxa 0431

Gibralter 0891, 1031, 1111

GoldStar 0031, 0121, 0351,

0411, 0731, 0741,

0861, 0941, 0971,

1001, 1031, 1111,

1151

Goodmans/Tashiko 0271, 0661,

1001

Granada 1001

Grundig 1781, 1791, 1801,

1811, 1821, 1831,

1841, 1851, 1861,

1871, 1881

Gunpy 1051, 1091

H/K 0721

Hallmark 0861

Hanseatic 1001

Harvard 1051, 1061

Hinari 1001, 1091

Hitachi 0181, 0351, 0671,

0681, 0691, 0701,

0711, 0871, 0941,

0971, 1351

Hypson 1001

Ima 1051

Indiana 1001

Infinity Reference 0101

Interfunk 1001

ITT 0611

Janeil 1131

JBL 0101

JCB 0951

Jensen 0311

Jinxing 1531, 1541, 1551,

1561, 1571, 1621,

1631, 1641, 1651,

1691, 1731

JVC (Victor) 0261, 0281, 0641,

0651, 0661, 0841

Kawasho 0901

Penny 0161, 0361, 0521,

0531, 0621, 0731,

0751, 0761, 0781,

0791, 0861, 0931,

0941, 1031, 1041,

1111, 1151, 1161

Peony 1561, 1621

Philco 0361, 0581, 0591,

0601, 0611, 0631,

0961, 1031, 1111

Philips 0101, 0401, 1001

Phonola 1001

Pilot 0941, 1031, 1111

Pioneer 0511, 0551, 0871

Portland 0941, 1031, 1121

Priceclub 0931

Prism 0751

Proscan 0761

Protech 1001

Proton 0501, 0861, 0941,

1021, 1161

Pulsar 0891

Pulser 1031

Quasar 0251, 0751, 1041

Quelle 1001

Radio Shack 0541, 0941, 1031,

1051, 1151

Radiola 1001

RCA 0051, 0141, 0151,

0181, 0411, 0491,

0531, 0761, 0771,

0871, 1031

Realistic 0541, 0861, 0941,

0971, 0981, 1031,

1051, 1111, 1151

Rhapsody 1011

R-line 1001

Runco 0891, 1111

Saisho 0331, 1081

Sampo 0361, 0941, 1021,

1111, 1151

Samsung 0331, 0341, 0351,

0361, 0861, 0931,

0941, 0971, 1001,

1031, 1111, 1151

Samsux 0941

Sanyo 0171, 0231, 0271,

0661, 0801, 0911,

0981, 1231, 1251,

1261

SBR 1001

Schneider 1001

Scimitsu 1031

Scotch 0861

Scott 0831, 0861, 0941,

1031, 1051, 1091

Sears 0101, 0161, 0171,

0351, 0481, 0521,

0621, 0761, 0801,

0861, 0971, 0981,

1091

Shanghai 1561, 1681

Sharp 0461, 0471, 0541,

0661, 0911, 0941,

1141

Shogun 1031

Signature 0991, 1771

LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES

LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT

Kaypani 1021

Kenwood 0361, 1031, 1111

Kloss 0631, 0721, 1131

KTV 0921, 0941, 1011,

1051, 1111

Leyco 1001

Liesenk & Tter 1001

Lloytron 0941

Loewe 1001

Logik 0991, 1771

Luxman 0351, 0971

Lxi 0101, 0621, 0761,

0861, 0981

Magnavox 0101, 0341, 0391,

0401, 0411, 0421,

0581, 0591, 0601,

0611, 0631, 0661,

0961, 1111

Majestic 0991

Marantz 0101, 0221, 0361,

1001, 1111

Mark 1001

Matsui 0271, 0331, 1001

Mediator 1001

Megatron 0691, 0861, 1161

MEI 1011

M Electronic 1001

Memorex 0331, 0571, 0861,

0971, 0981, 0991,

1771

Metz 1791, 1831, 1891,

1901, 1911, 1921,

1931, 1941

MGA 0361, 0561, 0571,

0861, 1031, 1111

Midland 0751, 0761, 0891,

0941, 1151

Mitsubishi 0221, 0321, 0561,

0571, 0661, 0861,

1031, 1101, 1381

Montgomery 1091

Motorola 1041, 1141

MTC 0351, 0361, 0881,

0931, 0971, 1011,

1031, 1111

Multitech 0881, 1051

NAD 0551, 0621, 0861

NEC 0241, 0351, 0361,

0661, 0971, 1031,

1111, 1321, 1711

Neckermann 1001

Nei 1001

Nikkai 0271, 0431, 1001,

1151

Nikko 0861, 1111, 1121

Novabeam 0721

NTC 1121

Onwa 1051

Optimus 0551

Optonica 0541, 1(“1

Orion 0831, 1001

Osaki 0271, 1151

Otto Versand 1001

Panasonic 0101, 0191, 0251,

0751, 1041, 1311,

1371, 1431

Panda 1541, 1721

03HTR5450/5440code(UCA) 3/28/1, 4:54 PM1

Simpson 0581, 0961

Solavox 1151

Sonoko 1001

Sontec 1001

Sony 0371, 0451, 0661,

0841, 0951, 1281,

1441

Soundesign 0861, 0961, 1051,

1091

Soundwave 1001

Spectricon 1161

Squareview 0481

SSS 1031, 1051

Star-lite 1051

Suprem 0951

Supre-macy 1131

Surpa 0351, 0971

Sylvania 0101, 0361, 0441,

0581, 0591, 0601,

0611, 0631, 0961,

1111

Symphonic 0481

Sysline 1001

Tandy 0271, 0431, 1141

Tatung 0271, 0881, 1001,

1041, 1161

Tcl 1561, 1631, 1701

Technics 0751

Techwood 0351, 0751, 0971

Teknika 0101, 0351, 0571,

0931, 0941, 0961,

0971, 0991, 1031,

1051, 1091, 1121,

1131, 1771

Teletech 0331

Tera 0501

Thakral 1671

Thorm 1001

TMK 0351, 0861, 0971,

1081

Toshiba 0381, 0521, 0621,

0661, 0931, 0981,

1301

Tosonic 1011

Totevision 0941

Trical 0911

Universal 0781, 0791

Universum 1001

Vector Research 0361, 1111

Vestel 1001

Video Concept 1101

Vidikron 0101, 0211

Vidtech 0861, 1031

Viking 1131

Wards 0101, 0361, 0451,

0541, 0581, 0591,

0601, 0611, 0771,

0781, 0791, 0861,

0971, 0991, 1031,

1091, 1111, 1771

Watson 1001

Xogego 1611, 1621, 1661,

1741, 1761

Yamaha 0361, 1031, 1111

Yoko 1001

Zenith 0011, 0041, 0891,

0991, 1771

Zonda 1161

CABLE

ABC 0256, 0376

Antronix 0136

Archer 0136, 0286

BBT 0076

Cabletime 0166

Cablevision 0196

Colour Voice 0306, 0346

Comtronics 0216, 0276

Eagle Comronics 0276

Eastern 0066

Electricord 0206

Electus 0266

GE 0116, 0126

GEC Cable System 0196

Hamlin H5 0676

Hamlin H6 0666

Hamlin H6S 0656

Hamlin H8 0646

Hamlin H9 0636

Jerrold 0256

Jerrold 400L 0626

Jerrold 450L 0616

Jerrold 550 0606

Jerrold Osd Catv 0596

Jerrold Sprucer 0436

Magnavox/Philips 0416, 0426

Mamm 0296

Memorex 0386

Movie Time 0146, 0206

Northcoast 0016

NSC 0146

Oak 0106

Oak Sigma 450 0546

Oak Sigma 550 0536

Panasonic TZ 120/130 0476

Panasonic TZ 170/180 0446

Panasonic TZ140 0466

Panasonic TZ150/160 0456

Paragon 0386

Philips 0036, 0216, 0306,

0316, 0326, 0336,

0346

Pioneer 0006, 0086

Pioneer BR50 0846

Pioneer BR60/70/80/81/82

0696

Pioneer BR90 0556

Pulsar 0386

RCA Digital Satellite System

0396, 0406

Realistic 0136

Regency/Eastern0686

Runco 0386

Samsung 0276

Scientific Atlanta 175/475 0576

Scientific Atlanta 75 0366, 0586

Scientific Atlanta 8650 0566

Signal 0276

SL Marx 0276

Spectavision 0236

Standard Components 0186

Starcom V 0256

Stargate 0276

Sylvania/Texscan 0376, 0496

Teknika 0176

Teleservice 0056

Teleview 0276

Texscan 0186, 0376

TFC 0026

Tocom 0226, 0356

Tocom 5503A 0526

Tocom 5503VIP/5507 0516

Tocom TC56 0506

Toshiba 0386

Tudi 0046

Unika 0136

Universal 0136, 0156, 0206,

0286

Videoway 0096

Viewstar 0216

Zenith 0246, 0386, 0486

SATELLITE TUNER

Alpha Star 0826

Chaparral 0756

Echostar 0836

General Instrument 0776

HTS 0836

Hughes Network Systems 0816

Jerrold 0776, 0786

Panasonic 0806

Primestar 0776, 0786

RCA 0766

Sony 0796

VCR

A Tandy 0902

Adventura 0992

Aiko 0982

Aiwa 0992

Akai 0262, 0942, 0952,

0962, 0972

American High 0932

Amstrad 0992

ASA 0002, 0912

Asha 0922

Audio Dynamics 0202

Audiovox 0912

Beaumark 0922

Bell & Howell 0902

Blaupunkt 0412

Broksonic 0872, 0882, 0892

Bush 0852

Calix 0912

Canon 0862, 0932

CCE 0852, 0982

Citizen 0912, 0982

Colt 0852

Craig 0832, 0842, 0852,

0912, 0922

Curtis Mathes 0662, 0822, 0932

Cybernex 0922

Daewoo 0802, 0812, 0982

DBX 0202

Dynatech 0472, 0992

Electrohome 0912

Electrophonic 0912

Emerex 0792

Emerson 0072, 0132, 0142,

0152, 0162, 0172,

0182, 0192, 0212,

0702, 0712, 0722,

0732, 0742, 0752,

0762, 0772, 0782,

0872, 0882, 0892,

0912, 0952, 0992,

1072

Finlux 0002, 0992

Fisher 0682, 0692, 0842,

0902

Fuji 0672, 0932

Funai 0992

Garrard 0992

GE 0662, 0822, 0932

Go Video 0642, 0652

GoldStar 0082, 0632, 0912

Goodmans 0402

Gradiente 0992

Granda 0612, 0902

Grundig 0002

H/K 1082

Harley Davidson 0992

Harmon/Kardon 0632, 1082

Harwood 0752, 0852

Headquarter 0612

HI-Q 0842

Hinari 0852

Hitachi 0102, 0562, 0572,

0582, 0592, 0602,

0992

ITT 0942

JVC (Victor) 0202, 0522, 0532,

0542, 0552

Kenwood 0202, 0542, 0612,

0632, 0902

KLH 0852

Kodak 0912, 0932

Lloyd 0992

Logik 0852

Luxor 0942

LXI 0022, 0912

Magnavox 0002, 0482, 0492,

0502, 0512, 0932

Magnin 0922

Marantz 0002, 0202, 0402,

0632, 0932

Marta 0912

Matsui 0722

Matsushita 0932

MEI 0222, 0932

Memorex 0232, 0242, 0472,

0512, 0612, 0842,

0902, 0912, 0922,

0932, 0992

MGA 0762, 0952

MGA Technology 0922

Minolta 0592, 0602

Mitsubishi 0452, 0462, 0542,

0762, 0952, 1082

Motorola 0472, 0932

MTC 0922, 0992

Multitech 0852, 0992

NAD 0442

NEC 0122, 0202, 0292,

0422, 0432, 0542,

0632

Nikko 0912

Noblex 0922

Olympus 0412, 0932

Optimus 0442, 0472, 0912

Optonica 0402

Orion 0212, 0722, 0742,

0772

Osaki 0912

Panasonic 0012, 0052, 0092,

0222, 0372, 0382,

0392, 0412, 0932

Penny 0202, 0432, 0602,

0632, 0692, 0912,

0922, 0932

Pentax 0592, 0602

Perdio 0992

Philco 0002, 0932

Philips 0002, 0282, 0402,

0492, 0932

Pilot 0912

Pioneer 0442, 0542

Proscan 1002, 1012, 1022,

1032, 1042, 1052,

1062

Pulsar 0512

Quarter 0612

Quartz 0272, 0612

Quasar 0382, 0392, 0932

Radio Shack 0912, 0992

Radix 0912

Randex 0912

03HTR5450/5440code(UCA) 3/28/1, 4:54 PM2

iii

RCA 0112, 0382, 0392,

0482, 0592, 0602,

0662, 0822, 0942

Realistic 0402, 0472, 0612,

0682, 0842, 0902,

0912, 0922, 0932,

0992

Ricoh 0352, 0362

Saisho 0212, 0582, 0722,

0732, 0742, 0772

Salora 0612, 0762

Samsung 0212, 0312, 0922,

0962

Sanky 0472, 0512

Sansui 0292, 0542, 0832

Sanyo 0242, 0612, 0842,

0902, 0922

SBR 0002, 0282

Schneider 0852

Scott 0342, 0712, 0762,

0872, 0882, 0892

Sears 0302, 0592, 0602,

0612, 0682, 0692,

0842, 0902, 0912,

0932

Sharp 0402, 0472

Shintom 0852

Shogun 0922

Singer 0852

Sony 0032, 0332, 0352,

0362, 0672, 0792,

0932

STS 0602

Sunpak 0352

Sylvania 0002, 0492, 0502,

0762, 0932, 0992

Symphonic 0992

Tandy 0992

Tashiko 0712, 0992

Teac 0992

Technics 0932

Teknika 0322, 0912, 0932,

0992

Telefunken 0252

TMK 0212, 0732, 0772,

0922

Toshiba 0062, 0302, 0342,

0622, 0682, 0712,

0762

Totevision 0912, 0922

Unitech 0922

Vector Research 0202, 0432, 0632

Video Concepts 0202, 0432, 0632,

0952

Wards 0322, 0402, 0472,

0482, 0602, 0712,

0842, 0852, 0922,

0932, 0992

Yamaha 0202, 0632

Zenith 0042, 0362, 0512,

0672

DVD PLAYER

Akai 0108

Denon 0368

Hitachi 0388

JVC (Victor) 0168, 0348

Kenwood 0288

Magnavox 0248

Mitsubishi 0268

Onkyo 0128, 0248

Panasonic 0048

Philips 0188, 0248

Pioneer 0208, 0228

Proscan 0308

RCA 0308

Samsung 0148

Sharp 0068

Sony 0028

Technics 0048

Thomson 0328

Toshiba 0088, 0248

Yamaha 0008, 0048, 0188,

0248

Zenith 0248

LD PLAYER

Aiwa 0157

Denon 0147

Disco Vision 0017

Funai 0157

Hitachi (E) 0017

Kenwood 0087, 0107

Magnavox 0027

Marantz 0027

Mitsubishi 0137

NAD 0137

Panasonic 0077, 0177

Philips 0027

Pioneer 0037, 0017, 0137

RCA 0167

Realistic 0157

Sharp 0127

Sony 0047, 0057, 0117

Victor 0097

Yamaha 0007, 0067

CD PLAYER

Acoustic Research 1295

ADC 0025, 0065

Adcom 0205, 0255, 1015

ADS 0265

Aiwa 0295, 0945, 1035,

1055

Akai 0175, 0485, 0535

Alpine 1215, 1305

Audio-Technica 0545

BSR 0245, 0655, 0775

California Audio Lab 0055

Capetronic 1205

Carrera 0245

Carver 0285, 1135

Casio 0345

Crown 0185

Curtis Mathes 0345

Denon 0275, 0875, 0885

Deual (E) 0505

Dynamic Bass (H) 0555

Emerson 0205, 0325, 1105

Eroica 1275

Fisher 0095, 0555, 0925,

1005

Garrard 0365

Genexxa 0305, 0325, 1105

GoldStar 1225, 1265, 1135,

1335

H/K 0105, 0175, 0465,

0995

Hitachi 0195, 0505, 0205,

0815

Inkel 0115, 0395

JVC (Victor) 0315

Kenwood 0045, 0095, 0405,

0585, 0725, 0735,

0745, 0755, 0895

Kyocera 0025

Luxman 0075, 0425, 0675,

0705, 0715, 0985

Magnavox 0165, 0215, 0645,

0955

Marantz 0215, 0235, 0375,

0785, 1345

McIntosh 0355, 1085

MCS 0905, 1315

Memorex 0205, 0225, 0235,

0305, 0325, 1105

MGA 0135

Mission 0215

Mitsubishi 0135, 0445

MTC 1255

NAD 0035, 0615, 0685,

0695

Nakamichi 0125, 0435, 0515

NEC 0255, 0905, 0965

Nikko 0545, 1005

Onkyo 0155, 0455, 0495,

0805, 1155

Optimus 0225, 0245, 0555,

0595, 0845, 0855,

0865, 0895, 0935

Panasonic 0055, 0825, 1095,

1125

Penny 0905

Philips 0165, 0215

Pioneer 0305, 0935, 1045

Proton 0215, 1185

Quasar 0055

RCA 0205, 0915, 1115

Realistic 0205, 0225, 0235,

0325, 0555, 0845

Revox 1175

Rotel 0215

Saba Telecommander (E) 0505

SAE 0215

Samsung 1285

Sansui 0215, 0625, 0975,

1025, 1105

Sanyo 0145, 0555, 0635,

0765

Scott 0325, 1105

Sears 0345

Sharp 0235, 0665, 0895,

1065, 1075

Sherwood 0115, 0235, 0395,

0475

Siements Garrard 1245

Signature 0175

Sontec 1165

Sony 0065, 0565, 0865,

1145

Staron 1235

STS 0025

Sylvania 0215

Symphnoic 0335

Tandy 0305

Tangberg 1195

Teac 0235, 0335, 0385,

0525, 0795, 0835,

1355

Technics 0055, 0605, 1095

Techwood 1325

Telefunken (E) 0505

Thomson (E) 0505

Toshiba 0035, 0685

Vector Research 0065, 1135

Wards 0175

Yamaha 0005, 0015, 0085,

0415, 0545, 0575,

1065

CD-RECORDER/CD-RW

Hitachi 0474

JVC (Victor) 0504

Marantz 0484, 0494

Philips 0444

Pioneer 0454, 0464

Yamaha 0414

MD RECORDER

Pioneer 0424

Sharp 0434

Yamaha 0024, 0394, 0404

TAPE DECK

Aiwa 0094, 0214, 0224

Akai 0184

Carver 0094

Denon 0304

Fisher 0144

Garrard 0194, 0204

JVC (Victor) 0274, 0284, 0294

Kenwood 0124, 0134, 0154,

0234, 0244, 0264

Magnavox 0094

Marantz 0094, 0344

Mitsubishi 0184

Onkyo 0364, 0374

Optimus 0034, 0064, 0204,

0334

Philips 0094

Pioneer 0034, 0044, 0064

Revox 0354

Sansui 0094, 0344

Sharp 0264

Sherwood 0334

Sony 0054, 0084, 0324

Teac 0194, 0254

Technics 0074, 0314

Wards 0034

Yamaha 0004, 0014, 0104,

0114, 0164, 0174,

0264

03HTR5450/5440code(UCA) 4/17/1, 1:50 PM3

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia ID V723100-2

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

HTR-5450

HTR-5440

Natural Sound AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

U C A

00HTR5450/5440-cv 3/29/1, 11:27 AM1

SPEAKERS

MAIN

—

R L

—

CENTER REAR

(SURROUND)

—

S VIDEO

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

DVD

D-TV/CBL

VCR 1

OUT

VIDEO SIGNAL

AUDIO SIGNAL

SUB

WOOFER

OUTPUT

VCR 1

OUT

OUT(REC)

IN(PLAY)

AUX

MD/CD-R

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

AM ANT GND

FM ANT

UNBAL.

TUNER

MAIN

CENTER

SUB WOOFER

SURROUND

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

AUDIO OUT S VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

OPTICAL

AUDIO

OUT

S VIDEO IN

VIDEO IN

S VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

OPTICAL

OUT

RLRL

DVD player

Main speakers A Main speakers B

Rear speakers

Video signal

Optical signal

Signal flow

Center speaker

Subwoofer

system

Video Monitor

Connection Guide (when listening to a digital 5.1-channel source)

Analog signal

(U.S.A. model)

S Video signal

L R

RX-V520/RX-V520RDS

HTR-5450/HTR-5450RDS only

V728210 RX-V520/RX-V420 (ML)

SLEEP

TEST

A/B/C/D/E

MUTE

VOLUME

–/+

POWER

TIME/LEVEL

Quick Reference Card

DISPLAY (MD)

SLEEP

EFFECT

MUTE

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

POWER

REC/PAUSE

PLAY

DIR A (TAPE)

SKIP– (MD)

REWIND (TAPE)

SEARCH (MD)

PAUSE (MD)

DECK A/B (TAPE)

DIR B (TAPE)

SKIP+ (MD)

STOP

FAST FORWARD (TAPE)

SEARCH (MD)

TAPE/MD

DISPLAY

SLEEP

EFFECT

MUTE

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

POWER

PLAY

SKIP–

PAUSE

TV INPUT

SKIP+

STOP

DISC SKIP–/+

DVD/LD

DISPLAY

SLEEP

EFFECT

MUTE

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

POWER

PLAY

SKIP–

PAUSE

TV INPUT

SKIP+

STOP

DISC SKIP–/+

V728130

SET

EFFECT

6CH INPUT

PRESET–/+

TV VOLUME

PRG+,

PRG–

Input selector

buttons

TV INPUT

AMP(TUNER)

6CH INPUT

Input selector

buttons

6CH INPUT

Input selector

buttons

6CH INPUT

Input selector

buttons

V520(Q)_Quick 2/1/1, 1:37 PM1

Quick Reference Card

RETURN

TITLE

CLEAR

INDEX

+10

MUTE

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

DISC SKIP–/+

POWER

Numeric buttons

TV INPUT

DVD MENU

MENU SELECT

MENU LEFT

MENU RIGHT

MENU DOWN

MENU UP

CHANNEL

CBL/SAT

CHANNEL–/+

DISPLAY

TV SLEEP

+100

MUTE

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

CBL/SAT

POWER

MENU SELECT

MENU LEFT

RECALL

MENU UP

TV INPUT

MENU RIGHT

MENU DOWN

CBL/SAT

CHANNEL

ENTER

VCR REC

DISPLAY

TV SLEEP

EFFECT

TV MUTE

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

POWER

VCR PLAY

VCR

REWIND

CHANNEL

VCR

PAUSE

TV INPUT

VCR STOP

VCR FAST

FORWARD

CHANNEL–/+

CHANNEL

ENTER

DISPLAY

TV SLEEP

EFFECT

CHANNEL

ENTER

MUTE

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

VCR

POWER

VCR PLAY

VCR

REWIND

CHANNEL

VCR

PAUSE

TV INPUT

VCR STOP

VCR FAST

FORWARD

VCR

CHANNEL–/+

VCR

VCR REC

Press this button twice to start recording.

Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour commencer l’enregistrement.

Drücken Sie diese Taste zweimal, um die Aufnahme zu starten.

Tryck två gånger på den här knappen för att börja spela in.

V728130

*1 Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione.

Presione dos veces este botón para empezar a grabar.

Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen.

V520(Q)_Quick 2/1/1, 1:38 PM2

Transcripción de documentos

UCA HTR-5450 HTR-5440 Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 00HTR5450/5440-cv 1 OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI Printed in Malaysia ID V723100-1 3/29/1, 11:27 AM SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 8 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • 9 10 Explanation of Graphical Symbols 11 The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 12 13 14 WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated. 2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. 3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. 4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions should be followed. 5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, etc. 6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. 6A A unit and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the unit and cart combination to overturn. 7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. 15 1 16 17 18 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For example, the unit should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface, that may block the ventilation openings; or placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings. Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce heat. Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the unit. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit. Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer. Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time. Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the inside of the unit. Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the unit; or C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged. Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit beyond those means described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away from power lines. Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated. ICAUTION CAUTION 0101HTR5450/5440_caution_EN 2 3/28/1, 4:47 PM SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 19 MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE PREPARATION Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING INTRODUCTION For US customers only: Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only) 1. APPENDIX We Want You Listening For A Lifetime Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. English YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. CAUTION CAUTION II 0101HTR5450/5440_caution_EN 3 3/28/1, 4:47 PM ADVANCED OPERATION 3. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. BASIC OPERATION 2. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the right and left, and 10 cm at the back of this unit for ventilation space — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not place this unit where it may get exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/ or liquid drops inside this unit. 15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General models only) Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area. North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. CAUTION III CAUTION 0101HTR5450/5440_caution_EN 4 3/28/1, 4:47 PM INTRODUCTION CONTENTS ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION Checking the Package Contents ............................. 3 Battery Installation in the Remote Control ............ 3 Battery Replacement .............................................. 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ....................... 4 4 6 7 8 9 SET MENU ......................................................... 32 Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU .............. 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) .......... 2 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ...... 3 I/O ASSIGN ...................................................... 4 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................. 5 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) ................. 6 DTS SET (DTS LFE level) ............................... 7 SP DLY TIME (center delay) ............................ 8 DISPLAY SET .................................................. 9 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ...................... 32 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 36 36 PREPARATION Front Panel ............................................................. Remote Control ...................................................... Using the Remote Control ...................................... Display ................................................................... Rear Panel .............................................................. INTRODUCTION FEATURES .......................................................... 2 GETTING STARTED ......................................... 3 DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS .......................................................... 37 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ............................................ 10 Speakers to Be Used ............................................ 10 Speaker Placement ............................................... 10 CONNECTIONS ............................................... 11 ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE .... 19 Before You Start Adjusting .................................. 19 Using the Test Tone .............................................. 19 SLEEP TIMER .................................................. 39 Setting the SLEEP Timer ..................................... 39 Canceling the SLEEP Timer ................................ 39 PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ...................... 40 Component Selector Buttons ............................... Controlling the Components Connected to This Unit .......................................................... Description of Each Mode ................................... Setting the Manufacturer Code ............................ Returning to the Factory Setting .......................... BASIC OPERATION Before Connecting Components ........................... 11 Connecting Audio Components ........................... 12 Connecting an External Decoder ......................... 12 Connecting Video Components ............................ 14 Connecting Speakers ............................................ 16 IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch ..................... 18 Connecting the Power Supply Cords ................... 18 Delay Time ........................................................... 37 Sound Output Level of the Center, Right Rear and Left Rear Speakers, and Subwoofer .......... 37 Adjusting Method ................................................ 38 40 40 41 45 46 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............................ 47 Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................ 47 CINEMA DSP Programs ...................................... 47 PLAYING A SOURCE ...................................... 21 Input Modes and Indications ................................ 23 Selecting a DSP Program ..................................... 24 Canceling the Sound Effect (turning off the effect speakers) ....................... 25 TUNING ............................................................. 26 26 27 27 APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING .................................... 50 SPECIFICATIONS (HTR-5450) ...................... 54 SPECIFICATIONS (HTR-5440) ...................... 55 GLOSSARY ....................................................... 56 INDEX ................................................................ 58 28 29 29 30 APPENDIX Connecting the Antennas ..................................... Automatic Tuning ................................................ Manual Tuning ..................................................... Automatic Preset Tuning (for FM stations only) ...................................... Manual Preset Tuning .......................................... To Recall a Preset Station .................................... Exchanging Preset Stations .................................. ADVANCED OPERATION BASIC OPERATION RECORDING A SOURCE ............................... 31 English 1 0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 1 3/28/1, 4:47 PM FEATURES 5-Channel Power Amplification ◆ Minimum RMS Output (0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz) HTR-5450 [U.S.A. and Canada models] Main: 80 W + 80 W (8 Ω) Center: 80 W (8 Ω) Rear: 80 W + 80 W (8 Ω) [Australia, Singapore, China and General models] Main: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω) Center: 70 W (8 Ω) Rear: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω) HTR-5440 Main: 65 W + 65 W (8 Ω) Center: 65 W (8 Ω) Rear: 65 W + 65 W (8 Ω) ◆ Maximum Power (EIAJ) (10% THD, 1 kHz) HTR-5450 [China and General models] Main: 100 W + 100 W (8 Ω) Center: 100 W (8 Ω) Rear: 100 W + 100 W (8 Ω) HTR-5440 [China and General models] Main: 95 W + 95 W (8 Ω) Center: 95 W (8 Ω) Rear: 95 W + 95 W (8 Ω) Multi-mode Digital Sound Field Processing ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ DTS Decoder Dolby Pro Logic Decoder Dolby Digital Decoder Hi-Fi DSP CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA Sophisticated FM/AM Tuner ◆ 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning ◆ Automatic Preset Tuning ◆ Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing) Other Features ◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter HTR-5450 only ◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 9 Items for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video System ◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future Formats ◆ Video Signal Input and Output Capability (Including S Video Connections HTR-5450 only ) ◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Signal Input Jacks ◆ SLEEP Timer ◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes • This document is the Owner’s Manual for both the HTR-5450 and HTR-5440. For details on various functions unique to each model, see the descriptions given for each model name. Illustrations for the HTR-5450 are used for common functions. • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this manual. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved. 2 0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 2 3/28/1, 4:47 PM GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Checking the Package Contents Check that the following items are included in your package. Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4 type) (Australia and Singapore models) Connection guide BASIC OPERATION Battery Replacement If the remote control operates only when it is close to the unit, the batteries are weak. Replace all the batteries with new ones. Be sure to replace the batteries within about two minutes. If it takes longer than two minutes, the codes preset for the remote control will return to the factory settings. 2 Notes 1 Turn the remote control over and slide the battery compartment cover in the direction of the arrow. 2 Insert the batteries (AAA, R03 or UM-4 type) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Close the battery compartment cover. English 1 3 0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 3 APPENDIX 3 • Use only AAA, R03 or UM-4 batteries for replacement. • Be sure the battery polarity is correct. (See the illustration inside the battery compartment.) • Remove the batteries if the remote control will not be used for an extended period of time. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. ADVANCED OPERATION Battery Installation in the Remote Control Quick reference card PREPARATION Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China and General models) AM loop antenna 3/28/1, 4:47 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel HTR-5450 1 3 2 4 5 6 VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT B EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L ON R TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO SILENT 7 8 qw 0 9 VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX e t yu i r op a HTR-5440 1 3 2 4 5 6 VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT B PROGRAM EFFECT PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L ON R TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES SILENT 7 8 0 9 qw e VIDEO L AUDIO R VIDEO AUX r t yu i op a 1 STANDBY/ON 2 Remote control sensor Press this switch to turn on the power of this unit or to set this unit in the standby mode. Before turning the power on, set the volume at the minimum level. This receives signals from the remote control. Standby mode In this mode, this unit consumes a very small quantity of power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 3 Display This shows various information. 4 INPUT MODE Press this button to select the input mode among AUTO, DTS and ANALOG for the sources that send two or more types of signals to this unit. 4 0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 4 3/28/1, 4:47 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS r VIDEO AUX jacks Turn this control to turn up or down the volume. Connect an auxiliary audio or video input source such as a game console or camcorder to these jacks. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. 6 6CH INPUT Press this button to select the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). 7 BASS Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the low-frequency response. 8 TREBLE Note • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and right main speakers. 9 BALANCE 0 SPEAKERS A/B q PROGRAM l / h Press l or h to select a DSP program when the effect speakers (center and rear) are turned on. The name of the selected program appears on the display. w EFFECT u PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) Press this button to turn on or off “ z ” on the display and switch the function between for storing a broadcasting station (preset tuning) and for tuning. This button is also used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. i MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Press this button to store the broadcasting stations. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to begin automatic preset tuning (for FM stations only). o TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Press this button to switch the tuning mode between automatic and manual. To use the automatic tuning method, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the display. To use the manual tuning method, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off. p FM/AM Press this button to switch the reception band between FM and AM. a INPUT l / h Press these buttons to select the input source (DVD, AUX, MD/CD-R, TUNER, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL) that you want to listen to or watch. The name of the selected input source appears on the display. APPENDIX Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center and rear). If you turn them off, all Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are directed to the right and left main speakers. In that case, the output levels of the right and left speakers may not match. Press this button to select one of 5 preset station groups (A to E). ADVANCED OPERATION Set A or B (or both A and B) to the ON position for the main speaker system (connected to this unit) that you want to use. Set the button(s) to the OFF position for the main speaker system that you don’t want to use. y A/B/C/D/E BASIC OPERATION This control is only effective for the sound from the main speakers. Turn the control to adjust the balance of the output volume from the right and left main speakers to compensate for sound imbalance caused by the speaker location or listening room conditions. When “ z ” appears on the display: This button is used to select a preset station number (1 to 8). Press l to select a lower and h to select a higher preset station number. When “ z ” goes off from the display: This button is used for tuning. Press l to tune in to lower frequencies, and h to tune in to higher frequencies. PREPARATION Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the high-frequency response. t PRESET/TUNING l / h INTRODUCTION 5 VOLUME e PHONES jack Connect the headphones to the PHONES jack so that this unit outputs audio signals for private listening. When listening with headphones privately, set both SPEAKERS A/B to the OFF position. English 5 0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 5 3/28/1, 4:47 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote Control This section describes basic operation of this unit with the remote control. First, press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. Refer to “PRESET REMOTE CONTROL” for full details. 3 POWER Each time you press this button, the unit switches between the power on and standby mode. 4 TEST Press this button to output the test tone for each speaker. 1 5 A/B/C/D/E, PRESET –/+ Press AMP(TUNER). 2 These buttons are used to select a preset station. A/B/C/D/E: To select one of a group (A to E) of preset stations PRESET –/+: To select a preset station number (1 to 8) 3 6 MUTE Press this button to mute the sound. To cancel mute, press this button again. q w e 4 7 VOLUME These buttons are used to adjust the volume level. u: To turn up the volume d: To turn down the volume 8 SLEEP 5 Press this button to set the SLEEP timer. 9 –/+ 6 TV VOLUME 7 These buttons adjust the settings of the SET MENU and TIME/LEVEL mode. 0 TIME/LEVEL 8 TV INPUT 9 Press this button to select the items in the TIME/LEVEL mode. q Input selector buttons r 0 t 1 Indicator This flashes in red when pressing a button on the remote control. If it flashes rapidly several times, press the selected button again. These buttons select the input source. CD: To play a CD TUNER: To listen to an FM or AM broadcast MD/CD-R: To play an MD or CD recorder (or tape deck) DVD: To play a DVD D-TV/CBL: To watch a TV/digital TV or cable TV VCR: To play a video cassette AUX: To use another audio component V-AUX: To use another audio/video component w 6CH INPUT Press this button to play a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. 2 Component selector buttons Press one of these buttons which corresponds to the component you want to control with the remote control. (The proper code must be set for your component. Refer to “Setting the Manufacturer Code”.) When the component selector button has been pressed, the remote control is set to that component operation mode. 6 0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 6 3/28/1, 4:47 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS e EFFECT Using the Remote Control Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center and rear). r PRG+, PRG– Remote control sensor t SET MENU INTRODUCTION Press these buttons to select a DSP program. Once you press SET MENU, these buttons are used for selecting the SET MENU item. (HTR-5450) Press this button to select the items in the SET MENU. Within approximately 6 m (20 feet) ADVANCED OPERATION Handle the remote control with care. Do not spill water, tea or other liquids on the remote control. Do not drop the remote control. Do not leave or store the remote control in the following conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – extremely low temperature. BASIC OPERATION Notes • • • • PREPARATION The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the infrared sensor during operation. When the sensor is covered or there is a large object between the remote control and the sensor, the sensor cannot receive signals. The sensor may not be able to receive signals properly when it is exposed to direct sunlight or a strong artificial light (such as a fluorescent or strobe light). In this case, change the direction of the light or reposition the unit to avoid direct lighting. APPENDIX English 7 0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 7 3/28/1, 4:47 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Display 1 2 5 6 4 3 VIRTUAL DOLBY DTS DIGITAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC ENHANCED MONO TV SPORTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 ENTERTAINMENT DISCO 5CH STEREO CONCERT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT BASS EXT. MEMORY GAME AUTO STEREO TUNED SLEEP DSP PCM 7 dB ms SP AB 8 K HZ 0 9 q w e 1 t indicator 8 v indicator The “t” indicator lights up when the built-in DTS decoder is turned on. This lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. 2 VIRTUAL indicator 9 Headphones indicator This lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP. This lights up when headphones are connected. 3 g and o indicators 0 Multi-information display “ g ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital decoder is on and the signals of the selected source are encoded with Dolby Digital. “ o ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on. This display shows various information: for example the name of the selected input source and the various settings during adjustment with the SET MENU. The current station frequency and band (FM or AM) also appear when the tuner is selected as the input source. 4 DSP program indicators This indicates the name of the selected DSP program. q MEMORY indicator 5 AUTO indicator This flashes for about 5 seconds after pressing MEMORY. During this period, the displayed station can be stored in the memory. This lights up when the unit is in the automatic tuning mode. w TUNED indicator 6 STEREO indicator This lights up when an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength is being received. This lights up when this unit tunes in to a station. e SLEEP indicator This lights up while the built-in SLEEP timer is on. 7 x indicator “ x ” lights up when the built-in digital sound field processor is on. 8 0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 8 3/28/1, 4:47 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear Panel HTR-5450 1 2 3 4 R TUNER AM ANT GND + SPEAKERS – – + 8 INTRODUCTION DIGITAL INPUT CD 7 6 5 L FM ANT A COAXIAL 75 UNBAL. MAIN OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L DVD CENTER D-TV/CBL B VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT MONITOR OUT SET BEFORE POWER ON MD/CD-R CENTER MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR R (SURROUND) L S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER + OPTICAL MD/CD-R AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL IMPEDANCE SELECTOR VIDEO MAIN A OR B: 4 A + B: 8 :6 :6 CENTER REAR MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER PREPARATION L – R DIGITAL OUTPUT AUX IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R CD 9 IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL OUT SUB WOOFER OUTPUT VCR 1 As this terminal is used for an examination in the factory, do not connect any equipment to this terminal. 0 (U.S.A. model) q HTR-5440 4 DIGITAL INPUT CD 6 5 R TUNER AM ANT GND + – SPEAKERS 7 – + 8 BASIC OPERATION 2 3 L FM ANT A COAXIAL 75 UNBAL. MAIN OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L CENTER DVD D-TV/CBL VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT B MONITOR OUT SET BEFORE POWER ON CENTER R SUB WOOFER + MAIN A OR B: 8 A + B:16 CENTER :8 REAR :8 REAR R (SURROUND) L MAIN A OR B: 4 A + B: 8 :6 :6 CENTER REAR L MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER ADVANCED OPERATION R AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL IMPEDANCE SELECTOR VIDEO MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER – R AUX CD IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R 9 IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL OUT VCR 1 SUB WOOFER OUTPUT As this terminal is used for an examination in the factory, do not connect any equipment to this terminal. 0 (U.S.A. model) 9 Audio component jacks See pages 12 and 13 for connection information. 0 SUBWOOFER jack See pages 12 and 13 for connection information. See page 17 for connection information. 4 Antenna input terminals q IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch See page 26 for connection information. Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your speaker impedance. Set this unit in the standby mode before you change the setting of this switch (see page 18). 5 Video component jacks See pages 14 and 15 for connection information. 6 Speaker terminals 7 AC power cord Connect to a power outlet. 8 AC OUTLET(S) China and General models only FREQUENCY STEP switch See page 26. VOLTAGE SELECTOR See page 18. Use these outlets to supply power to your other audio/video components (see page 18). 0102HTR5450/5440_01-09_EN 9 English See pages 16 and 17 for connection information. APPENDIX 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks HTR-5450 only 2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks 3 6CH INPUT jacks q 9 3/28/1, 4:47 PM PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP Speakers to Be Used This unit is designed to provide the best sound-field quality with a 5-speaker system, using main speakers, rear speakers and a center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacture to ensure even tonal quality. The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use highperformance models that can reproduce sounds over the full range for the center speaker and the rear speakers. ■ Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when playing back a source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Speaker Placement Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. Main speaker (R) Rear speaker (R) Subwoofer Main speaker (L) 1.8 m Center speaker Rear speaker (L) ■ Main speakers Place the right and left main speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the TV monitor should be the same. ■ Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet) above the floor. ■ Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your TV monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the monitor and centrally between the main speakers. Note • If the center speaker is not used, the sound will be heard from the right and left main speakers. In that case, “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to the NON position. ■ Subwoofer The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections. CAUTION Please use magnetically shielded speakers. Sometimes a video monitor may be adversely affected even when magnetically shielded speakers are used. Separate the speakers from the monitor if this happens. 10 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 10 3/28/1, 4:47 PM CONNECTIONS INTRODUCTION Before Connecting Components CAUTION Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been completed. Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different terminal names. Refer to the instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. Use RCA-type pin plug cables for connecting audio/video components with the exception described later. The input and output jacks for pin plugs can be distinguished as follows: video signals (composite) V V White analog audio signals for the left channel L L Red analog audio signals for the right channel R R coaxial digital signals C C BASIC OPERATION Yellow PREPARATION When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect it to the jacks with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. After completing all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct. ADVANCED OPERATION APPENDIX English 11 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 11 3/28/1, 4:47 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting Audio Components ■ Connecting to digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals. y • You can designate the input for each digital jack according to your component by using “3 I/O ASSIGN” in the SET MENU. • HTR-5450 only All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals. • HTR-5440 only When making connections between the digital signal jacks, you should connect the components to the same-named analog audio signal jacks of this unit, because a digital signal cannot be recorded by a recording component connected to this unit. • All digital signal input jacks are applicable to sampling frequencies of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz. About the dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. Note • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly. ■ Connecting a CD player y • The COAXIAL jack is available for a CD player which has coaxial digital output jack. • When you connect a CD player to both the analog and digital jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the digital jack. ■ Connecting an MD recorder, CD recorder or tape deck y • HTR-5450 only When you connect your recording component to both the analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given to the digital signal. • HTR-5440 only Connect the analog input/output jack of your recording component to the AUDIO jacks. Notes • When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • HTR-5450 only Since digital output and analog output (REC OUT) are independent of each other, the analog signal is output only to the analog jack, while the digital signal is output only to the digital jack. Connecting an External Decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and surround channels. Notes • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, changing items of “1 SPEAKER SET” in the SET MENU is not affected (except “MAIN LVL”). 12 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 12 3/28/1, 4:48 PM CONNECTIONS SUBWOOFER OUTPUT MAIN OUTPUT OUTPUT External decoder CD player INTRODUCTION COAXIAL OUTPUT L C R L R R L CENTER OUTPUT SURROUND OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT CD TUNER AM ANT GND 75 PREPARATION COAXIAL FM ANT UNBAL. OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L CENTER DVD D-TV/CBL VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT MONITOR OUT VIDEO MD/CD-R S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER OPTICAL MD/CD-R L R L AUX CD R OUTPUT IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL O OUT SUB WOOFER OUTPUT VCR 1 L R L OUTPUT MD recorder or CD recorder ADVANCED OPERATION OPTICAL INPUT O R INPUT Audio component BASIC OPERATION DIGITAL OUTPUT (HTR-5450/U.S.A. model) IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R OPTICAL OUTPUT indicates signal direction indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables APPENDIX L English 13 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 13 3/28/1, 4:48 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting Video Components ■ Audio signal jacks Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), input (IN) and output (OUT) properly. ■ Video signal jacks Be sure to connect the input (IN) and output (OUT) properly. ■ S VIDEO jacks HTR-5450 only Video monitor DVD player S VIDEO OUT S VIDEO IN If your video component has “S” (high-resolution) video jacks, they can be connected to this unit’s S VIDEO jacks. Otherwise, connect the composite video jacks of your video component to this unit’s composite video jacks. Notes S • Use a special S VIDEO cable (commercially available) for the S VIDEO connection. • If video signals are input from both the S VIDEO input and composite input jacks, the signals will be directed to their respective output jacks. S DVD D-TV/CBL VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT MONITOR OUT VIDEO S VIDEO S S S S S Video signal Signal flow S VIDEO OUT S VIDEO OUT TV/digital TV, cable TV or satellite tuner S VIDEO IN VCR ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) These jacks are used to connect any video input source such as a game console or camcorder to this unit. HTR-5450 S VIDEO VIDEO L HTR-5440 AUDIO R VIDEO OPTICAL V L AUDIO R VIDEO AUX VIDEO AUX S L R V O L R OPTICAL OUT AUDIO OUT R AUDIO OUT R AUDIO OUT L AUDIO OUT L VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S VIDEO OUT Game console or camcorder 14 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 14 3/28/1, 4:48 PM Game console or camcorder CONNECTIONS Video monitor OPTICAL OUTPUT DVD player S VIDEO OUTPUT L R VIDEO OUTPUT S VIDEO INPUT V S DIGITAL INPUT CD INTRODUCTION AUDIO OUTPUT O VIDEO INPUT V S TUNER AM ANT GND COAXIAL FM ANT 75 UNBAL. D-TV/CBL (HTR-5450/U.S.A. model) 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L CENTER SURROUND L DVD D-TV/CBL VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT MONITOR OUT VIDEO MD/CD-R S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER OPTICAL MD/CD-R PREPARATION OPTICAL L R O IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R CD S IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL V L R L VIDEO S VIDEO OUTPUT OUTPUT SUB WOOFER OUTPUT R L AUDIO INPUT TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner R S S S VIDEO OUTPUT V VCR AUDIO OUTPUT V S VIDEO INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT ADVANCED OPERATION OPTICAL OUTPUT OUT VCR 1 BASIC OPERATION AUX DIGITAL OUTPUT VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT indicates signal direction L indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables V indicates video cables S indicates S-video cables HTR-5450 only 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 15 3/28/1, 4:48 PM English 15 APPENDIX When using an LD player Connect the LD player output to the DVD jack. If the LD player has an OPTICAL digital output jack, connect it to this unit’s OPTICAL DVD jack. If it has analog jacks, connect it to the analog DVD jacks. If it has an “RF OUTPUT jack” to output a Dolby Digital RF signal (AC-3), use a commercially available RF demoduclator and connect it to the OPTICAL DVD jack. If connecting a DVD player and an LD player, connect the LD player to the digital input jack (ex. D-TV/CBL) or the analog input jack (D-TV/CBL or VCR 1). For details on connections and operations, refer to the operation instructions for the LD player. Note that this unit’s remote control can be used to operate the LD player by setting the corresponding manufacturer code for the DVD/LD mode. CONNECTIONS Connecting Speakers Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage the unit and/or speakers. ■ Speaker cables 1 Remove approx. 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 10 mm (3/8”) 1 2 ■ Connecting to the MAIN SPEAKERS terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 2 1 3 1 2 Unscrew the knob. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. y (U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China and General models only) • Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug ■ Connecting to the REAR and CENTER SPEAKERS terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 1 3 2 1 2 Open the tab. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. y (U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China and General models only) • Banana plug connections are also possible. First, open the tab and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. ■ Main speaker terminals One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the SPEAKERS A or B terminals. ■ Rear speaker terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ Center speaker terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. 16 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 16 3/28/1, 4:48 PM CONNECTIONS Main speakers A Main speakers B R + – SPEAKERS – + Right INTRODUCTION Left Right Left (HTR-5450/U.S.A. model) L A MAIN PREPARATION B IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON CENTER MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR REAR R (SURROUND) L + AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR – SUB WOOFER OUTPUT Subwoofer system Center speaker BASIC OPERATION Right Left Rear speakers ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Subwoofer connection When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. APPENDIX Notes • Adjust the subwoofer volume according to the operation instructions for the subwoofer. (Fine adjustment is possible using this unit’s output level control of the effect speakers.) • Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET”, “LFE LEVEL (5 DOLBY D. SET)” and “6 DTS SET” in the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. English 17 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 17 3/28/1, 4:48 PM CONNECTIONS IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise the unit may be damaged. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode. Select the right or left position according to the impedance of speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in the standby mode. (HTR-5450/General model) Switch Speaker position IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Main If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Main If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher. [Canada model only] The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Left AC OUTLETS SWITCHED IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER Right Impedance level ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Connecting the Power Supply Cords After completing all connections, connect the AC power cord to an AC power outlet. Disconnect the AC power cord if you will not use this unit for a long period of time. ■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) (HTR-5450/U.S.A. model) MAINS AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR To AC outlet U.S.A., Canada, Singapore, China and General models ................................................. 2 OUTLETS Australia model ................................................... 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords only from your audio/video components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or POWER). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W (50 W for China and General models). SWITCHED 18 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 18 3/28/1, 4:48 PM ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE Using the Test Tone The adjustment of each speaker sound output level should be performed at your listening position with the remote control. 3 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance between the main, center and rear speakers by using the built-in test tone generator. When this adjustment is performed, the sound output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder and DTS decoder. Note • Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the PHONES jack when using the test tone. PREPARATION 5 2,6 Before You Start Adjusting 2 1 1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. 2 Press TEST. “TEST LEFT” appears on the display. 3 Turn up the volume. You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from each speaker for about two seconds in following order: left main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker and left rear speaker. The display changes as shown below. VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT B EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO SILENT L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX (HTR-5450) 4 3 Set the volume at the minimum level. 2 Turn the power on. VOLUME TEST LEFT STANDBY /ON 3 TEST CENTER Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you use two main speaker systems, press both A and B. SPEAKERS A ON B OFF Set BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE to the center position. BASS – TREBLE + – + BALANCE L R TEST L SUR. TEST R SUR. Notes APPENDIX 4 TEST RIGHT ADVANCED OPERATION 1 BASIC OPERATION INPUT MODE TREBLE BASS • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set the unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections. • If the test tone cannot be heard from the center speaker, check the setting of “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU. English 19 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 19 3/28/1, 4:48 PM ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE 4 Adjust BALANCE on the front panel so that the sound output level of the right main speaker and the left main speaker is the same. BALANCE L R Front panel 5 Press –/+ repeatedly to adjust the output level of the speaker currently outputting the test tone so that it becomes almost the same as that of the main speakers. While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. 6 When the adjustment is complete, press TEST. The test tone stops. Notes • If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to the NON position, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted in step 5. The center channel sound is automatically output from the right and left main speakers. • For details on adjusting the subwoofer speaker, refer to “DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS” on page 37. • After adjusting with the test tone, it is possible to adjust the speaker level to taste while listening to the playback of an actual source. Refer to “DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS” on page 37. y • Once you have completed the adjustments, you can only adjust the overall volume level of your audio system by using VOLUME (or VOLUME (u/d)). • If there is insufficient sound output from the center and rear speakers, you may decrease the main speaker output level by setting “MAIN LVL” in the SET MENU to “–10 dB”. 20 0103HTR5450/5440_10-20_EN 20 3/28/1, 4:48 PM BASIC OPERATION PLAYING A SOURCE 2 4 1,6 Select the desired input source with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons). (Turn on the video monitor for video sources.) The name of the selected input source appears on the display. VOLUME D I G I T A L INPUT INTRODUCTION When using the remote control, press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON or INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E Front panel EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF Remote control MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO R OPTICAL PREPARATION SILENT L VIDEO AUX (HTR-5450) 3 6 7 4 Input source 2 6CH INPUT 7 4 or Front panel 1 Turn the power on. or • An audio source can not be played if “6CH INPUT” appears. Press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT”. • If you select and play a video source when “6CH INPUT” appears, the playback result will be a video image from the video source and the sound from the audio source selected by using “6CH INPUT”. y Front panel Remote control • The current input mode is also shown. Refer to “Input Modes and Indications” on page 23 for details. SPEAKERS A ON B APPENDIX Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you use two main speaker systems, press both A and B. ADVANCED OPERATION Notes STANDBY /ON 3 Remote control VOLUME Set the volume at the minimum level. Front panel 2 BASIC OPERATION To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks Press 6CH INPUT so that “6CH INPUT” appears on the display. 6 OFF Front panel English 21 0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 21 3/28/1, 4:48 PM PLAYING A SOURCE 5 Play the source. Refer to the instructions for the source component (and “TUNING” for details). Note • When controlling an audio/video component (MD recorder, CD player, DVD player, tape deck, etc.) with the remote control, press one of the component selector buttons, (TAPE/MD, CD, DVD/ LD, etc.), which corresponds to the component you want to control. Refer to “PRESET REMOTE CONTROL”. 6 ■ Notes on the digital signal HTR-5450 only The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle 96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and set the player for digital output. Refer to the operation instructions for the player.) Note the following when a 96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit: 1. The following indication will appear on the display. Adjust the volume to the desired output level. VOLUME PCM K HZ or Front panel Remote control If desired, adjust BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, etc. These controls are only effective for the sound from the main speakers. • BASS controls the low-frequency response. • TREBLE controls the high-frequency response. • BALANCE adjusts the balance of the output volume from the right and left main speakers. BASS 2. DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and right main speakers. Note • If “MAIN SP” in the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “BASS OUT” is set to SWFR or “BASS OUT” is set to BOTH, the sound is also output from the subwoofer. 3. Adjustment of the speaker output level described on page 37 cannot be made (except the level of the subwoofer) BALANCE TREBLE ■ BGV (background video) function – + + – L R Front panel 7 Use the digital sound field processor. Refer to “Selecting a DSP Program”. The BGV function allows you to combine a video image from a video source with a sound from an audio source. (For example, you can listen to classical music while you are watching a video.) This function can only be controlled with the remote control. Play a video source, and then select an audio source with the input selector buttons on the remote control. The BGV function does not work if you select the audio source with INPUT l / h on the front panel. PROGRAM or Remote control Front panel ■ To mute the sound Use this when you want to temporarily mute audio output. Press MUTE on the remote control. To restore the audio output to the previous volume level, press MUTE again. Note • During muting, “MUTE ON” appears on the display. ■ When you have finished using this unit Press STANDBY/ON (or POWER) to set this unit in the standby mode. 22 0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 22 3/28/1, 4:48 PM PLAYING A SOURCE Input Modes and Indications When using the remote control, press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. INPUT MODE or Front panel Remote control AUTO: ADVANCED OPERATION In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected in the following order: 1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal 2) Digital (PCM) signal 3) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected even if another signal is input at the same time. ANALOG (ANLG): In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected even if a digital signal is input at the same time. BASIC OPERATION Input mode PREPARATION Press INPUT MODE (or the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the display. • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • The following phenomena may occur if the input mode is set to AUTO when playing back a source encoded with DTS: – If you continue to play a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit automatically switches to the “DTSdecoding” mode to prevent noise from being generated during subsequent operation. (The “t” indicator lights up on the display.) The “t” indicator may flash immediately after playback of a source encoded with a DTS signal has finished. Only a source encoded with a DTS signal can be played back while this indicator is flashing. (The indicator will flash for less than a minute.) If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. – The “t” indicator may flash when a search or skip operation is performed. If this status continues for a certain length of time, the unit will automatically switch from the “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode and the “t” indicator will go out. INTRODUCTION This unit comes with various input jacks. If your component is connected to more than one type of input jack, you can set the priority of the input signal. ■ Notes on playing a source encoded with a DTS signal Notes APPENDIX • If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack is selected. • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting and reproduces 5.1 channel source. • The sound output may be interrupted for some LD players and DVD players in the following situation: When the input mode has been set to AUTO and a search is performed while playing the source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the sound may delay for a moment when playback is resumed. • Depending on the LD player, playback may not be made when playing an LD that is not digitally recorded with the input mode set to AUTO. If this happens, set the input mode to ANALOG. English 23 0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 23 3/28/1, 4:48 PM PLAYING A SOURCE ■ On the front panel Selecting a DSP Program You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. Refer to “SOUND FIELD PROGRAM” for details about each program. VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE y TREBLE BASS BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT • Make sure that the sound effect is turned on (see page 25). MEMORY – + – + L R ON OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES ■ On the remote control S VIDEO SILENT VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX (HTR-5450) PROGRAM 1 / Press PROGRAM l or h repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears for a moment and the selected DSP program indicator lights up on the display. 2 1 TUNING MODE Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. DIGITAL PROGRAM MOVIE THEATER 1 BASS EXT. DSP 2 Press PRG+ or PRG– repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears for a moment and the selected DSP program indicator lights up on the display. DIGITAL DSP program name y • If desired, adjust the delay time and the sound output level of each speaker. (Refer to “DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS” on page 37 for details.) Notes MOVIE THEATER 1 BASS EXT. DSP DSP program name • Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/ NORMAL or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. However, if “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to NON, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers. • When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jack of this unit is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. • HTR-5450 only When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo. 24 0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 24 3/28/1, 4:48 PM PLAYING A SOURCE ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT CINEMA Press EFFECT to cancel the sound effect and monitor only the main sound. Press EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on. EFFECT or The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode by setting “REAR LR SP” on the SET MENU to NON. Virtual CINEMA DSP is performed by using the main speakers. Front panel Remote control Notes – HTR-5450 only when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit. SILENT CINEMA SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy the realistic feel of the DSP program while using headphones. This feature delivers powerful surround reproduction just as if listening through the speakers. BASIC OPERATION • If the sound effect is canceled when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoding, the sounds of the center and rear channels are mixed and output from the main speakers. • If you turn off the sound effect when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoding, it may happen that the sound is output faintly or not output normally, depending on the source. In that case, turn back on the sound effect. PREPARATION Note • This unit is not set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “REAR LR SP” is set to NON in the following cases: – when the 5CH STEREO, PRO LOGIC/NORMAL, DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL or DTS/NORMAL program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when the Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is played; – when using the test tone; – when connecting the headphones (you will hear SILENT CINEMA); or INTRODUCTION Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the sound field effects of the DSP program without rear speakers. Using YAMAHA original technology, natural surround reproduction is possible through the generation of a virtual speaker. Canceling the Sound Effect (turning off the effect speakers) ADVANCED OPERATION You can listen to SILENT CINEMA by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the effect speakers are on. APPENDIX English 25 0104HTR5450/5440_21-25_EN 25 3/28/1, 4:49 PM TUNING Connecting the Antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General models only) FREQUENCY Because the interstation frequency spacing STEP differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in FM/AM your area. North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/ 10 kHz Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. 50KHZ /9KHZ ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 3 1 4 2 100KHZ /10KHZ AM loop antenna (included) Indoor FM antenna (included) TUNER AM ANT GND FM ANT 75 5 Antenna stand 1 Press and hold the tab to unlock the terminal hole. 2 Insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 3 Release the tab to lock the lead wires. Lightly pull the lead wires to confirm a good connection. 4 5 Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand. Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best reception is obtained. UNBAL. (U.S.A. model) y • The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and attached to a wall, etc. Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. ■ Connecting the indoor FM antenna Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. terminal. Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas. Note • Do not connect an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM antenna at the same time. 26 0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 26 3/28/1, 4:49 PM TUNING Automatic Tuning Manual Tuning Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually. Use INPUT l / h to select TUNER as input source. 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM or AM). “FM” or “AM” appears on the display. VOLUME INPUT D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R INTRODUCTION 1 OPTICAL FM/AM SILENT or VIDEO AUX (HTR-5450) 1 Use INPUT l / h to select TUNER as the input source. 32 1 3 INPUT Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off. TUNING MODE Goes off AUTO/MAN'L MONO 2 If “ z ” appears on the display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM or AM). “FM” or “AM” appears on the display. or EDIT 3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the display. TUNING MODE Turn “ z ” off 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to tune in to the desired station. To continue the tuning search, hold down the button. PRESET/TUNING Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO Note • If you tune in manually to an FM station, it will be automatically received in monaural mode to increase the signal quality. PRESET /TUNING EDIT Turn “ z ” off APPENDIX Press PRESET/TUNING l once to tune in to a lower frequency and h once to tune in to a higher frequency. Press the button again if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station. ADVANCED OPERATION If “ z ” appears on the display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. 4 BASIC OPERATION PRESET /TUNING FM/AM PREPARATION 4 PRESET/TUNING y English • Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station (because the signal from the station is weak). • When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the display. 27 0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 27 3/28/1, 4:49 PM TUNING ■ Automatic preset tuning options Automatic Preset Tuning (for FM stations only) You can make use of the automatic preset tuning function for FM stations only. This function enables the unit to automatically tune in with strong signals and to sequentially store up to 40 FM stations (5 groups x 8 stations). VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT ■ When automatic preset tuning is completed FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES SILENT S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX The display shows the frequency of the last preset station. Check the contents and the number of preset stations by following the procedure in the section “To Recall a Preset Station” on page 29. (HTR-5450) 3 21 1 You can select the preset number from which the unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Before automatic preset tuning begins (after pressing MEMORY in step 3), 1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l or h to select the preset number with which the first station will be stored. The automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn “ z ” off and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Press FM/AM to select the FM band. Notes FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the display. TUNING MODE Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Hold down MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for about 3 seconds. The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed toward the higher frequencies. Received stations are sequentially stored as A1, A2 ... A8. If more than 8 stations have been tuned, they are stored as preset station numbers in other groups (B, C, D and E) in that order. MEMORY • A new setting can be stored in place of the former one. • The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency. • You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM station by simply using the manual preset tuning method. • Even if the number of received stations is not enough to be stored up to E8, automatic preset tuning is automatically ended after searching for all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in monaural mode and store it by using the manual preset tuning method. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode. If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week, the memory will be erased. If so, store the stations again by using preset tuning methods. AUTO BASS EXT. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM Flashes 28 0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 28 3/28/1, 4:49 PM TUNING Manual Preset Tuning To Recall a Preset Station You can also store up to 40 stations (5 groups x 8 stations) manually. SURROUND INPUT MODE TREBLE BASS BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT You can also recall a preset station with the remote control. Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector and press TUNER on the input selector. FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF VOLUME MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R D I G I T A L OPTICAL D I G I TA L SILENT SURROUND STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX (HTR-5450) INPUT MODE TREBLE BASS 4 3 2,5 BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO SILENT Tune in to the desired station. Refer to “Automatic/Manual Tuning” for the tuning procedure. L AUDIO R OPTICAL PREPARATION 2 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT B PHONES 1 INTRODUCTION VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON You can recall any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number with which it was stored. VIDEO AUX (HTR-5450) 2 1 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select the desired group (A to E) of preset stations before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off. Make sure that “ z ” appears on the display. The selected group appears on the display. 1 2 1 A/B/C/D/E Press A/B/C/D/E to select the required group of preset stations. Make sure that “ z ” appears on the display. 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) with which you want to store the station before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off. Press l to select a lower preset station number and h to select a higher preset station number. PRESET/TUNING 5 Front panel 2 Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING l or h (or PRESET –/+) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the display along with the reception band, frequency, and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. PRESET/TUNING or Front panel APPENDIX Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off. The displayed station has been stored as the preset group and number you have selected, and the reception band and frequency appear and the “TUNED” indicator lights up on the display. or Remote control AUTO STEREO MEMORY ADVANCED OPERATION A/B/C/D/E BASIC OPERATION Flashes TUNED AUTO STEREO MAN'L/AUTO FM 6 TUNED Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. English Notes • A new setting can be stored in place of the former one. • The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency. 29 0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 29 3/28/1, 4:49 PM TUNING Exchanging Preset Stations You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. Example: Exchange preset station “E1” with “A5” VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT B EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES SILENT S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX (HTR-5450) 2,4 1 Recall preset station “E1”. Refer to the procedure in the section “To Recall a Preset Station” on page 29. 2 Hold down (PRESET/ TUNING) EDIT for about 3 second. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash. PRESET /TUNING EDIT BASS EXT. MEMORY Flashes 3 Recall preset station “A5” by using the buttons on the front panel. “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash. BASS EXT. MEMORY Flashes 4 Press (PRESET/TUNING) EDIT again. The display shows the exchange of stations has been completed. PRESET /TUNING EDIT MEMORY 30 0105HTR5450/5440_26-30_EN 30 3/28/1, 4:49 PM RECORDING A SOURCE 1,4 VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE TREBLE BASS BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO SILENT L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 2 4 2 If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. VOLUME Set the volume at the minimum level. HTR-5450 only Front panel Select the source you want to record. INPUT or Front panel Remote control Begin recording by the recording component connected to this unit. 4 Play the source and then turn up the volume to confirm the input source. For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be recorded. Set the DVD player (or CD player) as described in the player’s operation instructions so that the audio signals are output from the player’s analog outputs. APPENDIX 3 The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. VOLUME or Front panel ADVANCED OPERATION 2 ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software BASIC OPERATION 1 • HTR-5450 only Composite video and S video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only and an S video (or only a composite video) signal by your VCR. PREPARATION (HTR-5450) Notes • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The DSP program and the setting of VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE have no effect on the material being recorded. • A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. INTRODUCTION Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording component. Refer to the instructions for these components. Remote control English 31 0106HTR5450/5440_31_EN 31 3/28/1, 4:49 PM ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU The SET MENU consists of 9 items including the speaker mode setting. Use the SET MENU to enjoy the optimum audio/video playback for your system. 1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. y 2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. 3 Press PRG– (or PRG+) repeatedly to select the item (1 to 9) you want to adjust. • You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a source. 1 SPEAKER SET CENTER SP MAIN SP REAR LR SP BASS OUT MAIN LVL 2 HP TONE CTRL 3 I/O ASSIGN 4 INPUT MODE y 5 DOLBY D. SET • By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the same order as when pressing PRG–. LFE LEVEL 4 D-RANGE 6 DTS SET 7 SP DLY TIME 8 DISPLAY SET 9 MEM. GUARD Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU Press – or + once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the display. Depending on the item, press PRG– (or PRG+) to select a sub item. Adjustment should be made with the remote control. 1 3,6 5 Press – or + repeatedly to change the setting of the item. 6 Press PRG– (or PRG+) repeatedly until the input source name appears to exit from the SET MENU. 4,5 2 Note • Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting. 32 0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 32 3/28/1, 4:49 PM SET MENU 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) Notes LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range of the left and right main channel signal is directed to the left and right main speakers. SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. Note • When you select MAIN for “BASS OUT”, the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. ■ REAR LR SP (rear speaker mode) Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) Initial setting: LRG ■ CENTER SP (center speaker mode) By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration, the unit can provide good dialog localization for many listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire range of the center channel signal is directed to the center speaker. NON Select this if you do not have rear speakers. y • This unit is set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting NON for “REAR LR SP”. NON Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the center channel signals are directed to the left and right main speakers. APPENDIX SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. SML Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. ADVANCED OPERATION Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the left and right rear speakers. BASIC OPERATION • When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level adjustments in items of “1 SPEAKER SET” are not affected (except “MAIN LVL”). • HTR-5450 only When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, level adjustments in items “MAIN SP”, “BASS OUT” and “MAIN LVL” are possible, but those in items “CENTER SP” and “REAR LR SP” are not affected. Choices: LARGE, SMALL Initial setting: LARGE PREPARATION Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. ■ MAIN SP (main speaker mode) INTRODUCTION Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the settings of the SET MENU you adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust the items again. English 33 0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 33 3/28/1, 4:49 PM SET MENU ■ BASS OUT (bass out mode) LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH Initial setting: BOTH 2 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you use your headphones. Control range (dB): –6 to +3 Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble) dB SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the main speakers. BOTH Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE signals. Notes • When playing a 2-channel source (CD, MD, tape, video cassette etc.), select BOTH position to direct low bass signals (below 90 Hz) to the SUBWOOFER jack. • When you select SMALL (SML) for items “CENTER SP”, “MAIN SP” and “REAR LR SP”, the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from those channels are added to the LFE and output to the subwoofer. dB 3 I/O ASSIGN It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s DIGITAL jack settings (component names for terminals) differ from that component. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. Once you assign, you can select that component with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons). HTR-5450 ■ 3A (1) (for the OPTICAL OUTPUT jack) Initial setting: (1) MD/CD-R ■ MAIN LVL (main level mode) Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of the center and rear speakers with the main speakers because of the unusually high-efficiency performance of the main speakers. Choices: NORM (normal), –10 dB Initial setting: NORM ■ 3B (2) to (4) (for the OPTICAL INPUT jacks) Initial settings: (2) MD/CD-R (3) DVD (4) D-TV/CBL NORM (normal) Normally select this setting. –10 dB Select this if you cannot match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. 34 0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 34 3/28/1, 4:49 PM SET MENU ■ 3C (5) (for the COAXIAL INPUT jack) 5 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital signals. Initial setting: (5) CD Note • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. HTR-5440 Control value (dB): –20 to 0 Initial setting: 0 dB dB Initial settings: (1) DVD (2) D-TV/CBL Notes • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer. • Normally, around –6 dB to –8 dB is most suitable for listening at home. PREPARATION ■ 3A (1) and (2) (for the OPTICAL INPUT jacks) Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. INTRODUCTION ■ LFE LEVEL HTR-5440 Initial setting: (3) CD ■ D-RANGE (dynamic range) Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range (the difference between the maximum level and the minimum level of sounds). Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN Initial setting: MAX BASIC OPERATION ■ 3B (3) (for the COAXIAL INPUT jack) Note 4 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) • Select MAX for feature films. • Select STD for general use. • Select MIN for listening to sources at an extremely low volume level. MAX Output level Use this feature to designate the input mode when turning on the power of this unit with the source component connected to more than one type of input jacks. Choices: AUTO, LAST Initial setting: AUTO Dialog level APPENDIX Input level MIN Output level AUTO Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. LAST Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. Dialog level H-LEVEL CUT 0.0 1.0 1.0 Output level STD Dialog level English 0.0 L-LEVEL BST Input level Input level Note • When you select MIN, the sound output may be faint because some Dolby Digital signals are not compatible with the minimum-level dynamic range. In this case, select MAX or STD. 35 0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 35 3/28/1, 4:49 PM ADVANCED OPERATION • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. SET MENU 6 DTS SET (DTS LFE level) 8 DISPLAY SET This setting is effective only when this unit decodes DTS signals. ■ DIMMER You can adjust the brightness of the display. Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel when playing back a DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Control range : –4 to 0 Initial setting: 0 Control range (dB): –10 to +10 Initial setting: 0 dB 9 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) dB Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to the setting of the SET MENU and other settings on this unit. Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer. 7 SP DLY TIME (center delay) Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel sound. This feature works when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Ideally, the center speaker should be the same distance from the listening position as the left and right main speakers. However, in most home situations, the center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers. By delaying the sound from the center speaker, the apparent distance from the center speaker to the listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the left and right main speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialog. Choices: ON, OFF Initial setting: OFF Select ON to protect the following features: • All SET MENU items • Center, rear speakers and subwoofer levels • Delay time adjusted by using TIME/LEVEL Notes • When “9 MEM. GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When “9 MEM. GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. Control range (ms): 0 to 5 Initial setting: 0 ms ms Center speaker image C L C R RR RL y • Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speaker about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the actual position of the center speaker. 36 0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 36 3/28/1, 4:50 PM DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS Delay Time Notes • Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with some sources. • The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay time. 5. 6. 7. 9. Speaker Center Right rear Left rear Subwoofer Preset value (dB) 0 0 0 0 APPENDIX Preset value (ms) 45 30 15 26 2 36 10 69 23 13 13 20 16 16 20 15 15 20 15 15 20 5 5 20 5 5 • If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to the NON position, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted. This is because the center channel sound is automatically output from the right and left main speakers. • Once the sound output level has been adjusted, the level will be the same for all DSP programs. ADVANCED OPERATION 8. Program CONCERT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT DISCO 5CH STEREO GAME TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE 70 mm SPECTACLE DGTL SPECTACLE DTS SPECTACLE 70 mm SCI-FI DGTL SCI-FI DTS SCI-FI 70 mm ADVENTURE DGTL ADVENTURE DTS ADVENTURE 70 mm GENERAL DGTL GENERAL DTS GENERAL PRO LOGIC/NORMAL DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED Notes BASIC OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of each speaker even if it has already been adjusted in “ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE” procedure. PREPARATION You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the value, the later the sound effect is generated. The delay time can be individually adjusted to all DSP programs. Sound Output Level of the Center, Right Rear and Left Rear Speakers, and Subwoofer INTRODUCTION When using the digital sound field processor with the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS decoder, you can adjust the delay time between the main sound and sound effect, and each speaker’s output level as you wish. English 37 0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 37 3/28/1, 4:50 PM DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS Adjusting Method 3 Press – or + to adjust the delay time or speaker output levels. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the settings of any other item. Adjustments should be performed with the remote control while watching the information on the display. 1 Notes 3 2 1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. 2 Press TIME/LEVEL repeatedly to select the item you want to adjust. Each time you press TIME/LEVEL, the selected item changes and appears on the display as below. DELAY CENTER Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode. If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week, the latest values for the delay time and the center/rear/ subwoofer output levels that were set will automatically return to the preset values. If so, adjust the delay time and output levels again. Delay time Center speaker output level R SUR. Right rear speaker output level L SUR. Left rear speaker output level SWFR • If “CENTER SP” or “REAR LR SP” is set to NON, or “BASS OUT” is set to MAIN, the output level of that speaker cannot be adjusted. • When you adjust the output level with TIME/LEVEL, the settings you made with the test tone will be changed. • To adjust speakers other than the subwoofer, the adjusting procedure using test tones on page 19 is recommended. Subwoofer output level Note • Depending on the setting of the SET MENU, you may not be able to select all these items. 38 0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 38 3/28/1, 4:50 PM SLEEP TIMER Notes • First press AMP(TUNER), TAPE/MD, CD or DVD/LD on the component selector to set the SLEEP timer for this unit. • The SLEEP timer is effective for the components connected to the AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. Canceling the SLEEP Timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the display. It will soon disappear and the “SLEEP” indicator will go off. Play a source you want to enjoy when you are going to sleep. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to select the desired SLEEP time. Each time you press SLEEP, the SLEEP time will change as below: 120 90 60 BASIC OPERATION 1 • The SLEEP timer can also be canceled by setting the unit in the standby mode by using POWER on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON), or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC power outlet. 30 The SLEEP timer is off (SLEEP OFF). (This is the state before SLEEP is pressed.) ADVANCED OPERATION BASS EXT. SLEEP Flashes 3 PREPARATION Note Setting the SLEEP Timer INTRODUCTION The SLEEP timer can be used to automatically set this unit in the standby mode. This timer is useful when you are going to sleep while enjoying a broadcast or other desired input source. The SLEEP timer can only be set with the remote control. The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the display after the SLEEP timer has been set. The display returns to the previous indication. STEREO TUNED SLEEP APPENDIX Lights up English 39 0107HTR5450/5440_32-39_EN 39 3/28/1, 4:50 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL It is possible to control this unit and other YAMAHA A/V components using the remote control supplied with this unit. It is also possible to control components from other manufacturers (or some YAMAHA components) by setting the proper manufacturer code (a signal assigned to each manufacturer and component). Note • For the notes on batteries, operating distance and names and functions of the remote control, refer to each description in this manual. Component Selector Buttons There are eight component selector buttons. Press one of these buttons which corresponds to the component you want to control with the remote control. For example, if you press CD on the component selector, the remote control is set to the CD operation mode, allowing the CD player to be controlled. AMP(TUNER) You can perform the basic operations of this unit. CD The code for a YAMAHA CD player is factory set. DVD/LD & DVD MENU An LD player can be controlled in the DVD/LD mode. A DVD player can be controlled in the DVD/LD and DVD MENU modes. The code for a YAMAHA DVD player is factory set. TAPE/MD The code for a YAMAHA MD deck is factory set. (The code for the YAMAHA CD recorder and tape deck can also be set.) VCR A VCR can be controlled. TV A TV can be controlled. CBL/SAT A cable TV or satellite tuner can be controlled. Notes • The button functions on the remote control differ depending on the operation mode. Refer to the following pages for details. • When shipped from the factory, the YAMAHA manufacturer codes listed on page 49 are set for each dial position. If unable to operate your YAMAHA A/V component, please try using another YAMAHA code. Controlling the Components Connected to This Unit 3 Turn on the power. 4 Press CD on the input selector. 5 Press CD on the component selector. 6 Press p. Refer to “Description of Each Mode” for the CD player operation buttons. 7 Adjust the volume. ■ Example: To control YAMAHA CD player 5 2 3 4 7 6 1 Make sure that the volume is set at the minimum level. 2 Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. If you set the remote control with the manufacturer codes listed from page i at the end of this manual, you can control other brands of components. Refer to “Setting the Manufacturer Code” for details. 40 0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 40 3/28/1, 4:50 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL Description of Each Mode ■ TAPE/MD MODE INTRODUCTION Note • TV VOLUME functions if you have set the code for your TV. Press TAPE/MD. PREPARATION POWER This button turns this unit on if you have set the code for a YAMAHA tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder. This button turns on the tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code. Input selector buttons BASIC OPERATION 6CH INPUT EFFECT VOLUME MUTE DISPLAY (MD/CD-R) English • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 41 0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 41 3/28/1, 4:50 PM APPENDIX DECK A/B (TAPE) This button selects deck A or B on a double-cassette tape deck. e PAUSE (MD/CD-R) This button gives a pause in operation. a DIR B (TAPE) This button selects the playing direction of deck B. SKIP+ (MD/CD-R) This button skips to the next track. s STOP This button stops operation on a tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder. f FAST FORWARD (TAPE) This button winds a tape fast forward. SEARCH (MD/CD-R) This button initiates a fast-forward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. ADVANCED OPERATION SLEEP r REC/PAUSE This button gives a pause in recording on a tape deck or MD recorder. p PLAY This button plays a tape, an MD or CD-R. b DIR A (TAPE) This button selects the playing direction of deck A. SKIP– (MD/CD-R) This button skips to the previous track. w REWIND (TAPE) This button rewinds a tape. SEARCH (MD/CD-R) This button initiates a backward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. TV VOLUME PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ CD MODE Note • TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV. Press CD. POWER This button turns this unit on if you have set the code for a YAMAHA CD player. This button turns on the CD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code. Input selector buttons 6CH INPUT EFFECT DISC SKIP –/+ (for a CD player with CD changer) These buttons skip to the next or previous CD. VOLUME MUTE y TV VOLUME PAUSE/STOP function Press the button once to give a pause in operation and press once more to stop operation. SLEEP p PLAY This button plays a CD. b SKIP– This button skips to the beginning of the previous track. w SEARCH This button initiates a backward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. DISPLAY TV INPUT e PAUSE This button gives a pause in operation. The button functions as PAUSE/STOP* for operating a YAMAHA CD player under factory setting. a SKIP+ This button skips to the beginning of the next track. s STOP This button stops operation. The button functions as PAUSE/STOP* for operating YAMAHA CD players. f SEARCH This button initiates a fast-forward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 42 0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 42 3/28/1, 4:50 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ DVD/LD MODE Note • TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV. INTRODUCTION Press DVD/LD. POWER This button turns this unit on if you have set the code for a YAMAHA DVD or LD player. This button turns on the DVD or LD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code. Input selector buttons 6CH INPUT EFFECT DISC SKIP –/+ PREPARATION VOLUME MUTE SLEEP PAUSE SKIP – STOP TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT SKIP + PLAY SEARCH SEARCH BASIC OPERATION ■ DVD MENU MODE Notes • TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV. • DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players. POWER This button turns this unit on if you have set the code for a YAMAHA DVD or LD player. This button turns on the DVD or LD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code. ADVANCED OPERATION Press DVD MENU. Numeric buttons CLEAR +10 DISC SKIP –/+ VOLUME MUTE RETURN MENU LEFT MENU DOWN INDEX APPENDIX MENU UP TV VOLUME TV INPUT MENU RIGHT MENU SELECT MENU TITLE English • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 43 0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 43 3/28/1, 4:50 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ VCR MODE ■ CBL/SAT MODE Note Note • TV VOLUME, TV INPUT and TV SLEEP function if you have set the code for your TV. VCR POWER Press VCR. • TV VOLUME, TV INPUT and TV SLEEP function if you have set the code for your TV. CBL/SAT POWER Press CBL/SAT. CHANNEL EFFECT CHANNEL ENTER VCR CHANNEL –/+ VOLUME MUTE TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT VCR PAUSE TV SLEEP VCR REC Press this button twice to start recording. CHANNEL CBL/SAT CHANNEL –/+ VOLUME MUTE TV SLEEP MENU UP MENU LEFT VCR PLAY VCR FAST FORWARD VCR STOP VCR REWIND MENU DOWN +100 CHANNEL ENTER TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT MENU RIGHT MENU SELECT MENU RECALL ■ TV MODE Note • You can control your VCR if you have set the code for it. TV POWER Press TV. CHANNEL TV CHANNEL –/+ VOLUME TV MUTE TV SLEEP VCR REC Press this button twice. VCR STOP VCR REWIND EFFECT CHANNEL ENTER TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT VCR PAUSE VCR PLAY VCR FAST FORWARD • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 44 0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 44 3/28/1, 4:50 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL Setting the Manufacturer Code 1 2 Turn on your component to be used. Press one of the component selector buttons which corresponds to the component to be controlled. You can control a second (and third) VCR in the CBL/SAT and DVD MENU modes if a cable TV or satellite tuner, or DVD player is not being used. Note • In order to set a second (and third) VCR in the DVD MENU mode, it is necessary to first set up the code for an LD player in the DVD/LD mode. 1 2 Turn on the VCR to be used. Press CBL/SAT or DVD MENU on the component selector. Press both VOLUME buttons (u/d) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 4 Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit manufacturer code for the component to be used. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash, repeat step 3 and re-enter the code. 4 Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit code for the second (and third) VCR. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash, repeat step 3 and re-enter the code. 5 Press POWER (or any other button) on the remote control to check if you have set the code correctly. If your component cannot be controlled with the remote control, try setting another code for the same manufacturer. 5 Press POWER (or any other button) on the remote control to check if you have set the code correctly. If the VCR cannot be controlled with the remote control, try setting another code for the same manufacturer. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 BASIC OPERATION Press both VOLUME buttons (u/d) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. PREPARATION 3 INTRODUCTION You can set the code for the manufacturer of your component after pressing the component selector buttons other than AMP(TUNER). ■ To use a second (and third) VCR Notes APPENDIX • You can set only one code for one mode. • In the DVD/LD and DVD MENU modes: Be sure to press DVD/LD on the component selector before entering the code for the DVD/LD player. You cannot set the code for a DVD player after pressing DVD MENU on the component selector. The code set in the DVD/LD mode is also simultaneously set in the DVD MENU mode. • If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control supplied with your component. English 45 0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 45 3/28/1, 4:50 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ To return to the factory-set codes in each mode Returning to the Factory Setting ■ To return to the factory-set codes in all modes 1 Press one of the component selector buttons other than AMP(TUNER). 2 Press both VOLUME buttons (u/d) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 3 Enter the code number “9990”. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. 1 Press one of the component selector buttons which corresponds to the component to be returned to the factory-set code. 2 Press both VOLUME buttons (u/d) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 3 Enter the code number “0000”. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. The following codes are factory set. Component selector button Component Code TV CBL/SAT VCR DVD/LD CD TAPE/MD TV Cable TV VCR DVD player CD player MD recorder 0101 0006 0002 0008 (YAMAHA DVD player) 0005 (YAMAHA CD player) 0024 (YAMAHA MD recorder) Set component We recommend that you write all the code numbers you have set on the table above. 46 0108HTR5450/5440_40-46_EN 46 3/28/1, 4:50 PM Set code SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INTRODUCTION A digital sound field processor (DSP) based on the latest YAMAHA technology is built into this unit. It is possible to play back various sound fields for the source you are listening to. Note • Regardless of the program name and characteristics listed in the table below, select the sound field program that sounds best to you. Hi-Fi DSP Programs ■ For audio sources: Nos. 1 to 4 No. Program (group) Sub-program Features — 2 JAZZ CLUB — This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. 3 ROCK CONCERT — The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. 4 ENTERTAINMENT DISCO This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a highenergy, “immediate” sound. 5CH STEREO Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. Note CINEMA DSP Programs ■ For audio-video sources: Nos. 4 to 6 No. Program (group) Sub-program GAME Features 4 ENTERTAINMENT 5 TV SPORTS — Although the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained. 6 MONO MOVIE — This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence sound field. ADVANCED OPERATION • Reverberations (sound effects) for realizing the sound field and unprocessed stereo from the left and right main speakers is output. The sound is not output from the center speaker. (The sound is output when one of these programs is selected while playing a source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. If 5CH STEREO is selected, the sound is output from all speakers regardless of the input source.) BASIC OPERATION CONCERT HALL PREPARATION 1 A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. APPENDIX English 47 0109HTR5450/5440_47-49_EN 47 3/28/1, 4:50 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ■ For movie programs: Nos. 7 to 9 No. 7 Program (group) Sub-program MOVIE THEATER 1 SPECTACLE Input source 70 mm SPECTACLE Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL SPECTACLE Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS SPECTACLE DTS SCI-FI 8 70 mm SCI-FI Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL SCI-FI Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS SCI-FI DTS MOVIE THEATER 2 ADVENTURE 70 mm ADVENTURE Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL ADVENTURE Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) Features This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. DTS ADVENTURE DTS GENERAL 9 q/DTS SURROUND NORMAL 70 mm GENERAL Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL GENERAL Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS GENERAL DTS PRO LOGIC/ NORMAL Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DOLBY DIGITAL/ Dolby Digital NORMAL (5.1-channel) ENHANCED DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL DTS PRO LOGIC/ ENHANCED Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DOLBY DIGITAL/ Dolby Digital ENHANCED (5.1-channel) DTS DIGITAL SUR./ ENHANCED DTS This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. For the surround sound field, the harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully in a wide space at the rear of the sound field. The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects from sources. The highly efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and channel separation, and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. In this program, the digital sound field processor is not turned on. This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. Notes • The “ x ” indicator does not light up when selecting the sub-program “NORMAL” of the q/DTS SURROUND program. • If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to NON, no sound is output from the center speaker. • The effect sound is output from the main speakers when a monaural source is played with CINEMA DSP program groups 4 (GAME) and 5 to 8. 48 0109HTR5450/5440_47-49_EN 48 3/28/1, 4:50 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ■ MOVIE THEATER 1 and 2 The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER 70 mm programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. sound field ADVANCED OPERATION When the input source is encoded with Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) or DTS (Tri-Field CINEMA DSP) These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround and right surround channels. This processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTS-equipped movie theater Presence DSP sound field without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. DGTL SPECTACLE DTS SPECTACLE DGTL SCI-FI DTS SCI-FI DGTL ADVENTURE Left surround DSP Right surround DSP DTS ADVENTURE sound field sound field DGTL GENERAL DTS GENERAL BASIC OPERATION The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With the unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology. PREPARATION When the input source is analog, PCM or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2-channel These programs express an immense sound field and a large surround effect. They also give depth to the sound from the Presence DSP sound field main speakers to recreate the realistic sound of a Dolby Stereo theater. 70 mm SPECTACLE 70 mm SCI-FI 70 mm ADVENTURE Surround DSP 70 mm GENERAL INTRODUCTION Most commercially available movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. y • If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field. APPENDIX English 49 0109HTR5450/5440_47-49_EN 49 3/28/1, 4:50 PM APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem The unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. No sound and/or no picture. Cause Refer to page The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Firmly connect the power cord. 18 The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to the left or right position. Set the switch fully to the left or right position when the unit is in the standby mode. 18 The protection circuit has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 16, 17 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 – 15 An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons). The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The main speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 21 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 22 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. 22 Make connections using the same type of jack (between composites, S-VIDEOs, or components) for both the input and output. 14, 15 Digital signals other than PCM audio, Dolby Digital or DTS signal which this unit cannot reproduce are being input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc. The picture does not appear. Remedy The output and input for the video are connected to different types of video jacks. HTR-5450 only 21 16, 17 — HTR-5450 only The sound suddenly goes off. Only the speaker on one side can be heard. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn the unit back on. 18 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn the unit back on. 16, 17 The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again. 39 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 22 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 50 0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 50 3/28/1, 4:50 PM 12 – 17 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem No sound from the effect speakers. Cause Remedy Press EFFECT to turn it on. 25 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. 47, 48 22 The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 37 “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to NON. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 33 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4) has been selected. Select another DSP program. No sound from the subwoofer. — The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. A monaural source is being played with the program 9. Select another DSP program. “BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 34 “BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 34 47, 48 — “BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. Select MAIN. 34 The output mode for each speaker (main, center or rear) in the SET MENU does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate output mode for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration. 33, 34 Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 – 15 ADVANCED OPERATION A “humming” sound can be heard. 37 BASIC OPERATION The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). Poor bass reproduction. 47, 48 PREPARATION The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. INTRODUCTION The sound effect is off. A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input to this unit. HTR-5450 only No sound from the center speaker. Refer to page APPENDIX English 51 0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 51 3/28/1, 4:50 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Turn on the power to the component. Refer to page The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The effect and surround sounds cannot be recorded. The component connected to the REC OUT jacks of this unit is turned off. A source cannot be recorded. An analog source is being input during digital recording. HTR-5450 only Input a digital source. HTR-5450 only A source component and recording component are not digitally connected to the unit. HTR-5450 only Make digital connections. HTR-5450 only A digital source is being input during analog recording. Input an analog source. A source component and recording component are not analog connected to the unit. Make analog connections. The settings of the SET MENU and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “9 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF. 39 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — The sound is degraded when listening with headphones connected to a tape deck or CD player that is connected to this unit. This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of the unit. — There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment, or the unit. The unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move the unit further away from such equipment. — 31 It is not possible to record the effect and surround sounds by a recording component. 52 0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 52 — 3/28/1, 4:50 PM 12 – 15 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem Cause There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM FM antenna. The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 26 Use the manual tuning method. 27 There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. 26 The station is too weak. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. 27 26 The unit has been disconnected for a long period. Re-store the stations. 28 The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. 26 Use the manual tuning method. 27 Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. 26 A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). ■ Remote control Problem The unit or other component cannot be controlled. Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition the unit. 7 The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones. 3 The component to be controlled has not been selected. Press one of the component selector buttons, corresponding to the component to be controlled. 40 The remote control cannot control system components. The manufacturer code has not been set up properly. — Enter the code again. 45 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer. Use the original remote control supplied with your component. APPENDIX Depending on the manufacturer or the model, some components cannot be controlled with this unit’s remote control even though the code has been set up properly. ADVANCED OPERATION The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause — 53 53 3/28/1, 4:50 PM English After this unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) or if you mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating. 0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN BASIC OPERATION Use the manual tuning method. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. PREPARATION The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. There are continuous crackling and hissing AM noises. Refer to page INTRODUCTION FM stereo reception is noisy. Remedy SPECIFICATIONS (HTR-5450) AUDIO SECTION FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................... 80 W [Singapore, China and General models] ................................. 70 W • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Australia, Singapore, China and General models] ....................................................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Maximum power 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 ohms ....................................................... 100 W • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono/Stereo ............................. 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf) • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms ........................................................ 100 W • Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz) ..................................... 70 dB • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 ohms [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 105/125/145/165 W [China and General models] .............................. 95/115/135/155 W • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms ................................................... 60 or more • Frequency Response CD, etc. to Main L/R (1 kHz, 150 mV, 8 ohms) ................................................................ 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±0.5 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion CD, etc. to Main L/R (Effect Off, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 30 W, 8 ohms) .................................................................................. 0.025% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ...................................................................... 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ............................................................ 48 dB • Frequency Response ............................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2.0 dB AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 530 to 1710 kHz [Australia and Singapore models] ............................ 531 to 1611 kHz [China and General models] 10 kHz step ............................................................ 530 to 1710 kHz 9 kHz step .............................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD, etc. to Main L/R (Effect Off, 250 mV, shorted) ................................................................................ 100 dB or more • Usable Sensitivity .................................................................. 300 µV/m • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ..................................................................... 150 µV or less • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................... AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ..................................................... AC 240 V/50 Hz [Singapore model] ................................................... AC 230 V/50 Hz [China model] .......................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz [General model] ............................. AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz • Channel Separation CD, etc. to MAIN L/R (1 kHz) .................................................. 60 dB (10 kHz) ................................................ 45 dB • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz • Phones Output .......................................................... 490 mV/390 ohms • Input Sensitivity CD, etc ................................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms 6CH INPUT ........................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms • Maximum Input Signal CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................................ 2.2 V or more • Output Level REC OUT ............................................................. 150 mV/1.2 kohms SUBWOOFER ......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] .......................... NTSC [Australia and Singapore models] ............................................... PAL GENERAL • Power Consumption [U.S.A. model] ......................................................................... 240 W [Australia, Singapore, China and General models] ............................................................................................... 250 W [Canada model] ........................................................... 250 W/320 VA Standby Mode [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................ 0.90 W [Australia and Singapore models] ........................................ 0.96 W • Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] 5CH, 10% THD ........................................................................ 500 W • AC Outlets 2 (SWITCHED) [U.S.A., Canada and Singapore models] .... Total 100 W maximum [China and General models] ......................... Total 50 W maximum 1 (SWITCHED) [Australia model] ........................................ Total 100 W maximum • Dimension (W x H x D) ....................................... 435 x 151 x 390 mm • Composite Video Signal Level .................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms • Weight ....................................................................................... 10.0 kg • S-Video Signal Level Y ............................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms C ........................................................................ 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms • Accessories ................................................................... Remote Control ........................................................................................... Batteries ............................................................................. AM loop antenna .......................................................................... Indoor FM antenna ...................................................................... Quick Reference Card ............................................................................ Connection Guide • Signal to Noise Ratio ...................................................... 50 dB or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ...................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB * Specifications are subject to change without notice. 54 0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 54 3/28/1, 4:50 PM SPECIFICATIONS (HTR-5440) FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ...................................... 65 W • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Europe, U.K., Australia, Singapore, China and General models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Maximum power 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 ohms [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................... 80 W [Europe, U.K., Australia, Singapore, China and General models] ...................................................................... 75 W • DIN Standard Output Power [Europe model only] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms ......................................................... 95 W • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms .......................................................... 95 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 ohms [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 95/115/135/155 W [China and General models] .............................. 90/110/130/150 W • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms ................................................... 60 or more • Total Harmonic Distortion CD, etc. to MAIN L/R (Effect Off, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 30 W, 8 ohms) .................................................................................. 0.025% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD, etc. to MAIN L/R (Effect Off, 250 mV, shorted) ................................................................................ 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ..................................................................... 150 µV or less • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz • Phones Output .......................................................... 470 mV/390 ohms • Input Sensitivity CD, etc ................................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms 6CH INPUT ........................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms • Maximum Input Signal CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................................ 2.2 V or more • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ............................................................ 48 dB • Frequency Response ............................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2.0 dB AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 530 to 1710 kHz [Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models] ..... 531 to 1611 kHz [China and General models] 10 kHz step ............................................................ 530 to 1710 kHz 9 kHz step .............................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity .................................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................... AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ..................................................... AC 240 V/50 Hz [Europe, U.K., and Singapore models] ................... AC 230 V/50 Hz [China model] .......................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz [General model] ............................. AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. model] ......................................................................... 200 W [Canada model] .......................................................... 210 W/280 VA [Europe, U.K., Australia, Singapore China and General models] ............................................................................................... 210 W Standby Mode [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................ 0.90 W [Europe, U.K., Australia, Singapore and China models] ..... 0.96 W • Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] 5-ch, 10% THD ........................................................................ 480 W • AC Outlets 2 (SWITCHED) [U.S.A., Canada and Singapore models] .... Total 100 W maximum [China and General models] ......................... Total 50 W maximum 1 (SWITCHED) [Australia model] ........................................ Total 100 W maximum • Dimension (W x H x D) ....................................... 435 x 151 x 390 mm • Weight ......................................................................................... 9.5 kg • Composite Video Signal Level .................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms • Accessories ................................................................... Remote Control ........................................................................................... Batteries ............................................................................. AM loop antenna .......................................................................... Indoor FM antenna ...................................................................... Quick Reference Card ............................................................................ Connection Guide • Signal to Noise Ratio ...................................................... 50 dB or more * Specifications are subject to change without notice. VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] .......................... NTSC [Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models] ........................ PAL English • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite ...................................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB 55 0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 55 APPENDIX • Output Level REC OUT ............................................................. 150 mV/1.2 kohms SUBWOOFER ......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ...................................................................... 0.2%/0.3% ADVANCED OPERATION • Channel Separation CD, etc. to MAIN L/R (1 kHz) .................................................. 60 dB (10 kHz) ................................................ 45 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 76 dB/70 dB BASIC OPERATION • Frequency Response CD, etc. to MAIN L/R .................................. 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±5 dB • Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz) ..................................... 70 dB PREPARATION • IEC Output Power [Europe model only] 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ....................................................... 67 W • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono/Stereo ............................. 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf) INTRODUCTION AUDIO SECTION 3/28/1, 4:50 PM GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround ■ LFE 0.1 channel Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel systems. ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With three front channels (left, center and right), and two rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the five full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround ■ CINEMA DSP ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear speakers. It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a minimum two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system is practically distortion-free, clear 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, two rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). 56 0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 56 D I G I T A L Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. 3/28/1, 4:50 PM GLOSSARY ■ S VIDEO signal HTR-5450 only INTRODUCTION With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) PREPARATION Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits HTR-5450 only BASIC OPERATION When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ I/O ASSIGN (SET MENU) APPENDIX Although component is normally connected according to jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a function that assigns jacks according to the component being connected. If the component being used differs from the component name shown for this unit’s digital jacks, it is possible to assign jacks according to the component being connected. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. English 57 0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 57 3/28/1, 4:50 PM INDEX A M AC outlets ...................................................................................... 18 Antennas ........................................................................................ 26 B Manufacturer codes .................................................................... 45, i Memory back-up ............................................................... 28, 33, 38 MEM. GUARD (SET MENU) ...................................................... 36 Muting ........................................................................................... 22 BALANCE .................................................................................... 22 BGV function ................................................................................ 22 P C CBL/SAT mode ............................................................................. 44 CD mode ........................................................................................ 42 CINEMA DSP ......................................................................... 47, 56 Connections Antennas ................................................................................. 26 Audio components (MD recorder, CD recorder and CD player) .............................................................................. 12 External decoder ..................................................................... 12 Power supply cords ................................................................ 18 Speakers ................................................................................. 16 Video components (DVD player, VCR and TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner) ............................. 14 D Delay time ..................................................................................... 37 Display ............................................................................................. 8 DISPLAY SET (SET MENU) ....................................................... 36 DOLBY D. SET (SET MENU) D-RANGE .............................................................................. 35 LFE LEVEL ........................................................................... 35 Dolby Digital ................................................................................. 56 Dolby Surround (Dolby Pro Logic) ............................................... 56 DSP program CINEMA DSP program .......................................................... 47 Hi-Fi DSP program ................................................................. 47 DTS ............................................................................................... 56 DTS SET (SET MENU) ................................................................ 36 Dust protection cap ........................................................................ 12 DVD/LD mode .............................................................................. 43 DVD MENU mode ........................................................................ 43 Package contents ............................................................................. 3 PCM ............................................................................................... 57 Playing ........................................................................................... 21 Power supply cords ....................................................................... 18 Preset stations Exchanging preset station ....................................................... 30 To recall a preset station ......................................................... 29 Presetting tuning Automatic preset tuning ......................................................... 28 Manual preset tuning .............................................................. 29 R Rear panel ........................................................................................ 9 Recording ...................................................................................... 31 Remote control Basic operation ......................................................................... 6 Batteries .................................................................................... 3 Operation range ........................................................................ 7 Setup codes ............................................................................. 45 S Front panel ....................................................................................... 4 Sampling frequency (HTR-5450 only) .................................... 22, 57 SET MENU ................................................................................... 32 SILENT CINEMA ................................................................... 25, 56 Sleep timer ..................................................................................... 39 SP DLY TIME (SET MENU) ........................................................ 36 Speaker Output levels (TIME/LEVEL mode) ...................................... 37 Placement ............................................................................... 10 Output balance (test tone) ...................................................... 19 SPEAKER SET (SET MENU) BASS OUT ............................................................................. 34 CENTER SP ........................................................................... 33 MAIN LVL ............................................................................. 34 MAIN SP ................................................................................ 33 REAR LR SP .......................................................................... 33 Subwoofer ..................................................................................... 17 S VIDEO (HTR-5450 only) .......................................................... 57 H T HP TONE CTRL (SET MENU) .................................................... 34 TAPE/MD mode ............................................................................ 41 Test tone ........................................................................................ 19 Tuning Automatic tuning .................................................................... 27 Manual tuning ........................................................................ 27 TV mode ........................................................................................ 44 E External decoder ............................................................................ 12 F I IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch ............................................... 18 INPUT MODE (SET MENU) ....................................................... 35 Input modes ................................................................................... 23 I/O ASSIGN (SET MENU) ..................................................... 34, 57 V L LFE .................................................................................... 35, 36, 56 VCR mode ..................................................................................... 44 Virtual CINEMA DSP ............................................................. 25, 56 58 0110HTR5450/5440_50-58_EN 58 3/28/1, 4:50 PM LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT Elin Elta Emerson 1001 0331 0001, 0021, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0091, 0111, 0811, 0821, 0831, 0841, 0851, 0861, 0871, 0901, 0921, 0941, 0981, 1011, 1031, 1051, 1081, 1091 Envision 0361, 1111 Erres 1001 Etron 0331 Ferguson 1001 Finlux 1001 Fisher 0171, 0801, 0981 Formenti 0441 Formonti 1001 Fortress 1141 Fujitsu 1091 Funai 1051, 1091, 1501, 1521 Futuretech 1051 GE 0131, 0161, 0201, 0751, 0761, 0771, 0781, 0791, 0811, 0861, 1041 GEC 0271, 1001 Gemini 0391 Genexxa 0431 Gibralter 0891, 1031, 1111 GoldStar 0031, 0121, 0351, 0411, 0731, 0741, 0861, 0941, 0971, 1001, 1031, 1111, 1151 Goodmans/Tashiko 0271, 0661, 1001 Granada 1001 Grundig 1781, 1791, 1801, 1811, 1821, 1831, 1841, 1851, 1861, 1871, 1881 Gunpy 1051, 1091 H/K 0721 Hallmark 0861 Hanseatic 1001 Harvard 1051, 1061 Hinari 1001, 1091 Hitachi 0181, 0351, 0671, 0681, 0691, 0701, 0711, 0871, 0941, 0971, 1351 Hypson 1001 Ima 1051 Indiana 1001 Infinity Reference 0101 Interfunk 1001 ITT 0611 Janeil 1131 JBL 0101 JCB 0951 Jensen 0311 Jinxing 1531, 1541, 1551, 1561, 1571, 1621, 1631, 1641, 1651, 1691, 1731 JVC (Victor) 0261, 0281, 0641, 0651, 0661, 0841 Kawasho 0901 TV A-Mark A Tandy Abex Admira Adventura Aiko Akai Alba Alleron Ambassador Amstrad Anam 1161 0941 1151 1141 1131 1121 0331, 1101, 1111 0431 1091 1081 0481, 1081 0251, 1041, 1051, 1061, 1071 Anam National 1041 AOC 0361, 1021, 1031, 1111, 1161 Archer 1161 Audiosonic 1001 Audiovox 1051, 1161 Aiwa 1481 Bauer 0441 Baur 1001 Beijing 1511, 1551, 1561 Belcor 1031 Bell & Howell 0981, 0991 Beon 1001 Bradford 1051 Brockwood 1031 Broksonic 1161 Bush 1001 Candle 0351, 0361, 0961, 0971, 1111, 1131 Capehart 1021 Carver 0101 Cathay 1001 Celebrity 0951 Centurion 0411 Changhong 1541, 1551, 1561, 1621 Citizen 0351, 0361, 0921, 0931, 0941, 0961, 0971, 1111, 1121, 1131 Clairtone 1011 Clarivox 1001 Concerto 0351, 0971 Conrowa 1751 Contec 0901, 0911, 1011, 1051 Corando 0941 Craig 0251, 1051 Crown 0941, 1051 Curtis Mathes 0161, 0361, 0931, 0941, 0981, 1111 CXC 1051 Daewoo 0291, 0301, 0331, 0721, 0941, 1001, 1031, 1121, 1191, 1531, 1581, 1591, 1601 Dansai 1001 Daytron 0941, 1031 Decca 0271, 1001 Dixi 0331, 1001, 1071 Dumont 0891, 1031 Dynatech 0881 Electroband 0951, 1011 Electrohome 0941 Electron 0941 Kaypani Kenwood Kloss KTV 1021 0361, 1031, 1111 0631, 0721, 1131 0921, 0941, 1011, 1051, 1111 Leyco 1001 Liesenk & Tter 1001 Lloytron 0941 Loewe 1001 Logik 0991, 1771 Luxman 0351, 0971 Lxi 0101, 0621, 0761, 0861, 0981 Magnavox 0101, 0341, 0391, 0401, 0411, 0421, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0631, 0661, 0961, 1111 Majestic 0991 Marantz 0101, 0221, 0361, 1001, 1111 Mark 1001 Matsui 0271, 0331, 1001 Mediator 1001 Megatron 0691, 0861, 1161 MEI 1011 M Electronic 1001 Memorex 0331, 0571, 0861, 0971, 0981, 0991, 1771 Metz 1791, 1831, 1891, 1901, 1911, 1921, 1931, 1941 MGA 0361, 0561, 0571, 0861, 1031, 1111 Midland 0751, 0761, 0891, 0941, 1151 Mitsubishi 0221, 0321, 0561, 0571, 0661, 0861, 1031, 1101, 1381 Montgomery 1091 Motorola 1041, 1141 MTC 0351, 0361, 0881, 0931, 0971, 1011, 1031, 1111 Multitech 0881, 1051 NAD 0551, 0621, 0861 NEC 0241, 0351, 0361, 0661, 0971, 1031, 1111, 1321, 1711 Neckermann 1001 Nei 1001 Nikkai 0271, 0431, 1001, 1151 Nikko 0861, 1111, 1121 Novabeam 0721 NTC 1121 Onwa 1051 Optimus 0551 Optonica 0541, 1(“1 Orion 0831, 1001 Osaki 0271, 1151 Otto Versand 1001 Panasonic 0101, 0191, 0251, 0751, 1041, 1311, 1371, 1431 Panda 1541, 1721 Penny Peony Philco Philips Phonola Pilot Pioneer Portland Priceclub Prism Proscan Protech Proton Pulsar Pulser Quasar Quelle Radio Shack Radiola RCA Realistic Rhapsody R-line Runco Saisho Sampo Samsung Samsux Sanyo SBR Schneider Scimitsu Scotch Scott Sears Shanghai Sharp Shogun Signature 0161, 0361, 0521, 0531, 0621, 0731, 0751, 0761, 0781, 0791, 0861, 0931, 0941, 1031, 1041, 1111, 1151, 1161 1561, 1621 0361, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0631, 0961, 1031, 1111 0101, 0401, 1001 1001 0941, 1031, 1111 0511, 0551, 0871 0941, 1031, 1121 0931 0751 0761 1001 0501, 0861, 0941, 1021, 1161 0891 1031 0251, 0751, 1041 1001 0541, 0941, 1031, 1051, 1151 1001 0051, 0141, 0151, 0181, 0411, 0491, 0531, 0761, 0771, 0871, 1031 0541, 0861, 0941, 0971, 0981, 1031, 1051, 1111, 1151 1011 1001 0891, 1111 0331, 1081 0361, 0941, 1021, 1111, 1151 0331, 0341, 0351, 0361, 0861, 0931, 0941, 0971, 1001, 1031, 1111, 1151 0941 0171, 0231, 0271, 0661, 0801, 0911, 0981, 1231, 1251, 1261 1001 1001 1031 0861 0831, 0861, 0941, 1031, 1051, 1091 0101, 0161, 0171, 0351, 0481, 0521, 0621, 0761, 0801, 0861, 0971, 0981, 1091 1561, 1681 0461, 0471, 0541, 0661, 0911, 0941, 1141 1031 0991, 1771 i 03HTR5450/5440code(UCA) 1 3/28/1, 4:54 PM Simpson Solavox Sonoko Sontec Sony 0581, 0961 1151 1001 1001 0371, 0451, 0661, 0841, 0951, 1281, 1441 Soundesign 0861, 0961, 1051, 1091 Soundwave 1001 Spectricon 1161 Squareview 0481 SSS 1031, 1051 Star-lite 1051 Suprem 0951 Supre-macy 1131 Surpa 0351, 0971 Sylvania 0101, 0361, 0441, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0631, 0961, 1111 Symphonic 0481 Sysline 1001 Tandy 0271, 0431, 1141 Tatung 0271, 0881, 1001, 1041, 1161 Tcl 1561, 1631, 1701 Technics 0751 Techwood 0351, 0751, 0971 Teknika 0101, 0351, 0571, 0931, 0941, 0961, 0971, 0991, 1031, 1051, 1091, 1121, 1131, 1771 Teletech 0331 Tera 0501 Thakral 1671 Thorm 1001 TMK 0351, 0861, 0971, 1081 Toshiba 0381, 0521, 0621, 0661, 0931, 0981, 1301 Tosonic 1011 Totevision 0941 Trical 0911 Universal 0781, 0791 Universum 1001 Vector Research 0361, 1111 Vestel 1001 Video Concept 1101 Vidikron 0101, 0211 Vidtech 0861, 1031 Viking 1131 Wards 0101, 0361, 0451, 0541, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0771, 0781, 0791, 0861, 0971, 0991, 1031, 1091, 1111, 1771 Watson 1001 Xogego 1611, 1621, 1661, 1741, 1761 Yamaha 0361, 1031, 1111 Yoko 1001 Zenith 0011, 0041, 0891, 0991, 1771 Zonda 1161 CABLE ABC 0256, 0376 Antronix 0136 Archer 0136, 0286 BBT 0076 Cabletime 0166 Cablevision 0196 Colour Voice 0306, 0346 Comtronics 0216, 0276 Eagle Comronics 0276 Eastern 0066 Electricord 0206 Electus 0266 GE 0116, 0126 GEC Cable System 0196 Hamlin H5 0676 Hamlin H6 0666 Hamlin H6S 0656 Hamlin H8 0646 Hamlin H9 0636 Jerrold 0256 Jerrold 400L 0626 Jerrold 450L 0616 Jerrold 550 0606 Jerrold Osd Catv 0596 Jerrold Sprucer 0436 Magnavox/Philips 0416, 0426 Mamm 0296 Memorex 0386 Movie Time 0146, 0206 Northcoast 0016 NSC 0146 Oak 0106 Oak Sigma 450 0546 Oak Sigma 550 0536 Panasonic TZ 120/130 0476 Panasonic TZ 170/180 0446 Panasonic TZ140 0466 Panasonic TZ150/160 0456 Paragon 0386 Philips 0036, 0216, 0306, 0316, 0326, 0336, 0346 Pioneer 0006, 0086 Pioneer BR50 0846 Pioneer BR60/70/80/81/82 0696 Pioneer BR90 0556 Pulsar 0386 RCA Digital Satellite System 0396, 0406 Realistic 0136 Regency/Eastern 0686 Runco 0386 Samsung 0276 Scientific Atlanta 175/475 0576 Scientific Atlanta 75 0366, 0586 Scientific Atlanta 8650 0566 Signal 0276 SL Marx 0276 Spectavision 0236 Standard Components 0186 Starcom V 0256 Stargate 0276 Sylvania/Texscan 0376, 0496 Teknika 0176 Teleservice 0056 Teleview 0276 Texscan 0186, 0376 TFC 0026 Tocom 0226, 0356 Tocom 5503A 0526 Tocom 5503VIP/5507 0516 Tocom TC56 0506 Toshiba 0386 Tudi 0046 Unika Universal Videoway Viewstar Zenith 0136 0136, 0156, 0206, 0286 0096 0216 0246, 0386, 0486 SATELLITE TUNER Alpha Star 0826 Chaparral 0756 Echostar 0836 General Instrument 0776 HTS 0836 Hughes Network Systems 0816 Jerrold 0776, 0786 Panasonic 0806 Primestar 0776, 0786 RCA 0766 Sony 0796 VCR A Tandy Adventura Aiko Aiwa Akai 0902 0992 0982 0992 0262, 0942, 0952, 0962, 0972 American High 0932 Amstrad 0992 ASA 0002, 0912 Asha 0922 Audio Dynamics 0202 Audiovox 0912 Beaumark 0922 Bell & Howell 0902 Blaupunkt 0412 Broksonic 0872, 0882, 0892 Bush 0852 Calix 0912 Canon 0862, 0932 CCE 0852, 0982 Citizen 0912, 0982 Colt 0852 Craig 0832, 0842, 0852, 0912, 0922 Curtis Mathes 0662, 0822, 0932 Cybernex 0922 Daewoo 0802, 0812, 0982 DBX 0202 Dynatech 0472, 0992 Electrohome 0912 Electrophonic 0912 Emerex 0792 Emerson 0072, 0132, 0142, 0152, 0162, 0172, 0182, 0192, 0212, 0702, 0712, 0722, 0732, 0742, 0752, 0762, 0772, 0782, 0872, 0882, 0892, 0912, 0952, 0992, 1072 Finlux 0002, 0992 Fisher 0682, 0692, 0842, 0902 Fuji 0672, 0932 Funai 0992 Garrard 0992 GE 0662, 0822, 0932 Go Video 0642, 0652 GoldStar 0082, 0632, 0912 Goodmans 0402 Gradiente 0992 Granda 0612, 0902 Grundig 0002 H/K 1082 ii 03HTR5450/5440code(UCA) 2 3/28/1, 4:54 PM Harley Davidson 0992 Harmon/Kardon 0632, 1082 Harwood 0752, 0852 Headquarter 0612 HI-Q 0842 Hinari 0852 Hitachi 0102, 0562, 0572, 0582, 0592, 0602, 0992 ITT 0942 JVC (Victor) 0202, 0522, 0532, 0542, 0552 Kenwood 0202, 0542, 0612, 0632, 0902 KLH 0852 Kodak 0912, 0932 Lloyd 0992 Logik 0852 Luxor 0942 LXI 0022, 0912 Magnavox 0002, 0482, 0492, 0502, 0512, 0932 Magnin 0922 Marantz 0002, 0202, 0402, 0632, 0932 Marta 0912 Matsui 0722 Matsushita 0932 MEI 0222, 0932 Memorex 0232, 0242, 0472, 0512, 0612, 0842, 0902, 0912, 0922, 0932, 0992 MGA 0762, 0952 MGA Technology 0922 Minolta 0592, 0602 Mitsubishi 0452, 0462, 0542, 0762, 0952, 1082 Motorola 0472, 0932 MTC 0922, 0992 Multitech 0852, 0992 NAD 0442 NEC 0122, 0202, 0292, 0422, 0432, 0542, 0632 Nikko 0912 Noblex 0922 Olympus 0412, 0932 Optimus 0442, 0472, 0912 Optonica 0402 Orion 0212, 0722, 0742, 0772 Osaki 0912 Panasonic 0012, 0052, 0092, 0222, 0372, 0382, 0392, 0412, 0932 Penny 0202, 0432, 0602, 0632, 0692, 0912, 0922, 0932 Pentax 0592, 0602 Perdio 0992 Philco 0002, 0932 Philips 0002, 0282, 0402, 0492, 0932 Pilot 0912 Pioneer 0442, 0542 Proscan 1002, 1012, 1022, 1032, 1042, 1052, 1062 Pulsar 0512 Quarter 0612 Quartz 0272, 0612 Quasar 0382, 0392, 0932 Radio Shack 0912, 0992 Radix 0912 Randex 0912 RCA Samsung Sharp Sony Technics Thomson Toshiba Yamaha RCA 0112, 0382, 0392, 0482, 0592, 0602, 0662, 0822, 0942 Realistic 0402, 0472, 0612, 0682, 0842, 0902, 0912, 0922, 0932, 0992 Ricoh 0352, 0362 Saisho 0212, 0582, 0722, 0732, 0742, 0772 Salora 0612, 0762 Samsung 0212, 0312, 0922, 0962 Sanky 0472, 0512 Sansui 0292, 0542, 0832 Sanyo 0242, 0612, 0842, 0902, 0922 SBR 0002, 0282 Schneider 0852 Scott 0342, 0712, 0762, 0872, 0882, 0892 Sears 0302, 0592, 0602, 0612, 0682, 0692, 0842, 0902, 0912, 0932 Sharp 0402, 0472 Shintom 0852 Shogun 0922 Singer 0852 Sony 0032, 0332, 0352, 0362, 0672, 0792, 0932 STS 0602 Sunpak 0352 Sylvania 0002, 0492, 0502, 0762, 0932, 0992 Symphonic 0992 Tandy 0992 Tashiko 0712, 0992 Teac 0992 Technics 0932 Teknika 0322, 0912, 0932, 0992 Telefunken 0252 TMK 0212, 0732, 0772, 0922 Toshiba 0062, 0302, 0342, 0622, 0682, 0712, 0762 Totevision 0912, 0922 Unitech 0922 Vector Research 0202, 0432, 0632 Video Concepts 0202, 0432, 0632, 0952 Wards 0322, 0402, 0472, 0482, 0602, 0712, 0842, 0852, 0922, 0932, 0992 Yamaha 0202, 0632 Zenith 0042, 0362, 0512, 0672 Zenith LD PLAYER Aiwa Denon Disco Vision Funai Hitachi (E) Kenwood Magnavox Marantz Mitsubishi NAD Panasonic Philips Pioneer RCA Realistic Sharp Sony Victor Yamaha 0157 0147 0017 0157 0017 0087, 0107 0027 0027 0137 0137 0077, 0177 0027 0037, 0017, 0137 0167 0157 0127 0047, 0057, 0117 0097 0007, 0067 CD PLAYER Acoustic Research 1295 ADC 0025, 0065 Adcom 0205, 0255, 1015 ADS 0265 Aiwa 0295, 0945, 1035, 1055 Akai 0175, 0485, 0535 Alpine 1215, 1305 Audio-Technica 0545 BSR 0245, 0655, 0775 California Audio Lab 0055 Capetronic 1205 Carrera 0245 Carver 0285, 1135 Casio 0345 Crown 0185 Curtis Mathes 0345 Denon 0275, 0875, 0885 Deual (E) 0505 Dynamic Bass (H) 0555 Emerson 0205, 0325, 1105 Eroica 1275 Fisher 0095, 0555, 0925, 1005 Garrard 0365 Genexxa 0305, 0325, 1105 GoldStar 1225, 1265, 1135, 1335 H/K 0105, 0175, 0465, 0995 Hitachi 0195, 0505, 0205, 0815 Inkel 0115, 0395 JVC (Victor) 0315 Kenwood 0045, 0095, 0405, 0585, 0725, 0735, 0745, 0755, 0895 Kyocera 0025 Luxman 0075, 0425, 0675, 0705, 0715, 0985 Magnavox 0165, 0215, 0645, 0955 DVD PLAYER Akai Denon Hitachi JVC (Victor) Kenwood Magnavox Mitsubishi Onkyo Panasonic Philips Pioneer Proscan 0308 0148 0068 0028 0048 0328 0088, 0248 0008, 0048, 0188, 0248 0248 0108 0368 0388 0168, 0348 0288 0248 0268 0128, 0248 0048 0188, 0248 0208, 0228 0308 Marantz 0215, 0235, 0375, 0785, 1345 McIntosh 0355, 1085 MCS 0905, 1315 Memorex 0205, 0225, 0235, 0305, 0325, 1105 MGA 0135 Mission 0215 Mitsubishi 0135, 0445 MTC 1255 NAD 0035, 0615, 0685, 0695 Nakamichi 0125, 0435, 0515 NEC 0255, 0905, 0965 Nikko 0545, 1005 Onkyo 0155, 0455, 0495, 0805, 1155 Optimus 0225, 0245, 0555, 0595, 0845, 0855, 0865, 0895, 0935 Panasonic 0055, 0825, 1095, 1125 Penny 0905 Philips 0165, 0215 Pioneer 0305, 0935, 1045 Proton 0215, 1185 Quasar 0055 RCA 0205, 0915, 1115 Realistic 0205, 0225, 0235, 0325, 0555, 0845 Revox 1175 Rotel 0215 Saba Telecommander (E) 0505 SAE 0215 Samsung 1285 Sansui 0215, 0625, 0975, 1025, 1105 Sanyo 0145, 0555, 0635, 0765 Scott 0325, 1105 Sears 0345 Sharp 0235, 0665, 0895, 1065, 1075 Sherwood 0115, 0235, 0395, 0475 Siements Garrard 1245 Signature 0175 Sontec 1165 Sony 0065, 0565, 0865, 1145 Staron 1235 STS 0025 Sylvania 0215 Symphnoic 0335 Tandy 0305 Tangberg 1195 Teac 0235, 0335, 0385, 0525, 0795, 0835, 1355 Technics 0055, 0605, 1095 Techwood 1325 Telefunken (E) 0505 Thomson (E) 0505 Toshiba 0035, 0685 Vector Research 0065, 1135 Wards 0175 Yamaha 0005, 0015, 0085, 0415, 0545, 0575, 1065 CD-RECORDER/CD-RW Hitachi JVC (Victor) Marantz Philips Pioneer Yamaha 0474 0504 0484, 0494 0444 0454, 0464 0414 MD RECORDER Pioneer Sharp Yamaha 0424 0434 0024, 0394, 0404 TAPE DECK Aiwa Akai Carver Denon Fisher Garrard JVC (Victor) Kenwood Magnavox Marantz Mitsubishi Onkyo Optimus Philips Pioneer Revox Sansui Sharp Sherwood Sony Teac Technics Wards Yamaha 0094, 0214, 0224 0184 0094 0304 0144 0194, 0204 0274, 0284, 0294 0124, 0134, 0154, 0234, 0244, 0264 0094 0094, 0344 0184 0364, 0374 0034, 0064, 0204, 0334 0094 0034, 0044, 0064 0354 0094, 0344 0264 0334 0054, 0084, 0324 0194, 0254 0074, 0314 0034 0004, 0014, 0104, 0114, 0164, 0174, 0264 iii 03HTR5450/5440code(UCA) 3 4/17/1, 1:50 PM UCA HTR-5450 HTR-5440 Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 00HTR5450/5440-cv 1 OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI Printed in Malaysia ID V723100-2 3/29/1, 11:27 AM Connection Guide (when listening to a digital 5.1-channel source) Main speakers A DVD player OPTICAL AUDIO OUT L S VIDEO OUT Main speakers B VIDEO OUT R R OPTICAL OUT S VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT L O L R L VIDEO OUT R V S DIGITAL INPUT CD R TUNER AM ANT GND SPEAKERS + — + — L FM ANT A COAXIAL 75 UNBAL. MAIN OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L DVD CENTER D-TV/CBL VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT B MONITOR OUT VIDEO MD/CD-R CENTER REAR R (SURROUND) L S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER + OPTICAL MD/CD-R L — R AUX CD IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL OUT SUB WOOFER OUTPUT VCR 1 S V * RX-V520/RX-V520RDS *HTR-5450/HTR-5450RDS only (U.S.A. model) * VIDEO IN L S VIDEO IN Analog signal S Video signal S DIGITAL OUTPUT R V O Video signal Optical signal Signal flow Video Monitor Subwoofer system Center speaker R L Rear speakers V728210 RX-V520/RX-V420 (ML) Quick Reference Card TAPE/MD AMP(TUNER) Input selector buttons Input selector buttons 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT EFFECT PRESET–/+ EFFECT EFFECT DISC SKIP–/+ EFFECT DISC SKIP–/+ VOLUME VOLUME TV VOLUME MUTE SLEEP SLEEP TV INPUT PRG+, PRG– REC/PAUSE PLAY DIR A (TAPE) SKIP– (MD) SET MENU REWIND (TAPE) SEARCH (MD) –/+ TIME/LEVEL POWER Input selector buttons Input selector buttons MUTE DVD/LD POWER POWER POWER A/B/C/D/E TEST CD VOLUME TV VOLUME DISPLAY (MD) DECK A/B (TAPE) PAUSE (MD) DIR B (TAPE) SKIP+ (MD) VOLUME TV VOLUME MUTE SLEEP DISPLAY TV INPUT PAUSE PLAY SKIP– SKIP+ SEARCH FAST FORWARD (TAPE) SEARCH (MD) STOP SEARCH STOP MUTE SLEEP PLAY SKIP– SEARCH TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT PAUSE SKIP+ SEARCH STOP V728130 V520(Q)_Quick 1 2/1/1, 1:37 PM Quick Reference Card VCR DVD MENU VCR POWER POWER Numeric buttons CLEAR +10 DISC SKIP–/+ VOLUME MUTE RETURN MENU SELECT MENU LEFT TITLE CBL/SAT TV VOLUME INDEX TV INPUT MENU UP CBL/SAT POWER MENU DOWN CHANNEL MUTE TV SLEEP *1 VCR REC VCR PLAY EFFECT CHANNEL ENTER VCR REWIND TV SLEEP 2 DISPLAY TV INPUT MENU UP MENU SELECT MENU LEFT VCR STOP CHANNEL TV CHANNEL–/+ VOLUME TV MUTE TV SLEEP *1 VCR REC VCR PLAY EFFECT CHANNEL ENTER TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT VCR PAUSE MENU RIGHT VCR FAST FORWARD *1 Press this button twice to start recording. Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour commencer l’enregistrement. Drücken Sie diese Taste zweimal, um die Aufnahme zu starten. Tryck två gånger på den här knappen för att börja spela in. V520(Q)_Quick TV VOLUME MUTE DISPLAY TV INPUT VCR PAUSE +100 CHANNEL ENTER CBL/SAT CHANNEL–/+ VOLUME TV VOLUME MENU RIGHT MENU TV POWER CHANNEL VCR CHANNEL–/+ VOLUME TV MENU RECALL VCR REWIND MENU DOWN Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione. Presione dos veces este botón para empezar a grabar. Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen. 2/1/1, 1:38 PM VCR FAST FORWARD VCR STOP V728130